Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

in the usual sense of the word

  • 1 in the usual sense of the word

    Универсальный англо-русский словарь > in the usual sense of the word

  • 2 sense

    sense [sens]
    1. noun
       a. ( = faculty) sens m
       b. ( = awareness) sens m
       c. ( = feeling) sentiment m
       d. ( = good sense) bon sens m
    they should have more sense! ils devraient avoir un peu plus de bon sens !
    one's senses ( = sanity)
       e. ( = reasonable quality) sens m
    what's the sense in (doing) that? à quoi ça rime ?
       f. ( = meaning) sens m
    in the literal/figurative sense au sens propre/figuré
       a. ( = become aware of) sentir (intuitivement) ; [+ trouble] pressentir
       b. [machine, sensor device] détecter
    * * *
    [sens] 1.
    1) (faculty, ability) sens m

    to dull/sharpen the senses — émousser/aiguiser les sens

    2) ( feeling)
    3) ( practical quality) bon sens m
    4) ( reason)

    to make sense[sentence, film, theory] avoir un sens

    5) ( meaning) gen, Linguistics sens m

    he is in a ou one ou some sense right to complain, but... — dans un certain sens il a raison de se plaindre, mais...

    2.
    senses plural noun ( sanity) raison f
    3.
    1) ( be aware of) deviner ( that que)
    2) [machine] détecter
    ••

    to knock ou pound US some sense into somebody — ramener quelqu'un à la raison

    English-French dictionary > sense

  • 3 sense

    1. noun
    1) (faculty of perception) Sinn, der

    sense of smell/touch/taste — Geruchs-/Tast-/Geschmackssinn, der

    2) in pl. (normal state of mind) Verstand, der

    have taken leave of one's sensesden Verstand verloren haben

    3) (consciousness) Gefühl, das

    sense of responsibility/guilt — Verantwortungs-/Schuldgefühl, das

    out of a sense of dutyaus Pflichtgefühl

    4) (practical wisdom) Verstand, der

    there's a lot of sense in what he's sayingwas er sagt, klingt sehr vernünftig

    have the sense to do somethingso vernünftig sein, etwas zu tun

    what is the sense of or in doing that? — was hat man davon od. wozu soll es gut sein, das zu tun?

    make somebody see sense — jemanden zur Vernunft bringen; see also academic.ru/14644/common_sense">common sense; good I 1.

    5) (meaning) Sinn, der; (of word) Bedeutung, die

    in the strict or literal sense — im strengen od. wörtlichen Sinn

    in every sense [of the word] — in jeder Hinsicht

    in a or one sense — in gewisser Hinsicht od. Weise

    it does not make sense to do thates ist Unsinn od. unvernünftig, das zu tun

    it makes [a lot of] sense — (is [very] reasonable) es ist [sehr] sinnvoll

    2. transitive verb
    spüren; [Tier:] wittern
    * * *
    [sens] 1. noun
    1) (one of the five powers (hearing, taste, sight, smell, touch) by which a person or animal feels or notices.) der Sinn
    2) (a feeling: He has an exaggerated sense of his own importance.) das Gefühl
    3) (an awareness of (something): a well-developed musical sense; She has no sense of humour.) der Sinn
    4) (good judgement: You can rely on him - he has plenty of sense.) der Verstand
    5) (a meaning (of a word).) der Sinn
    6) (something which is meaningful: Can you make sense of her letter?) der Sinn
    2. verb
    (to feel, become aware of, or realize: He sensed that she disapproved.) fühlen
    - senseless
    - senselessly
    - senselessness
    - senses
    - sixth sense
    * * *
    [sen(t)s]
    I. n
    1. no pl (judgement) Verstand m
    I hope they'll have the [good] \sense to shut the windows before they leave ich hoffe, sie sind so klug, die Fenster zu schließen, bevor sie gehen
    to make [good] \sense sinnvoll sein
    planning so far ahead makes no \sense es hat keinen Sinn, so weit im Voraus zu planen
    to see the \sense in sth den Sinn in etw dat sehen
    to talk \sense sich akk verständlich ausdrücken
    there's no \sense in doing sth es hat keinen Sinn, etw zu tun
    there's no \sense in waiting es ist zwecklos zu warten
    2. (reason)
    one's \senses pl jds gesunder Menschenverstand
    it's time you came to your \senses es wird Zeit, dass du zur Vernunft kommst
    to bring sb to their \senses jdn zur Vernunft bringen
    to take leave of one's \senses den Verstand verlieren
    3. (faculty) Sinn m
    \sense of hearing Gehör nt
    \sense of sight Sehvermögen nt
    \sense of smell/taste/touch Geruchs-/Geschmacks-/Tastsinn m
    the five \senses die fünf Sinne
    sixth \sense sechster Sinn
    4. (feeling) Gefühl nt
    did you get any \sense of how they might react? kannst du dir irgendwie denken, wie sie reagieren werden?
    to have a \sense that... das Gefühl haben, dass...
    I had a sudden \sense that I was needed at home ich spürte auf einmal, dass ich zu Hause gebraucht wurde
    \sense of beauty Schönheitssinn m
    \sense of belonging Zusammengehörigkeitsgefühl nt
    \sense of direction Orientierungssinn m
    \sense of duty Pflichtgefühl nt
    \sense of justice/reality Gerechtigkeits-/Realitätssinn m
    a \sense of security ein Gefühl nt der Sicherheit
    a \sense of social responsibility ein Gefühl nt für soziale Verantwortung
    \sense of time Zeitgefühl nt
    5. (meaning) Bedeutung f, Sinn m
    she's pretty hot, in more \senses than one sie ist ganz schön heiß, in mehr als einer Hinsicht
    the broad/narrow \sense of a word/term die weite/enge Bedeutung eines Wortes/Begriffes
    in the broad[est] \sense of the term im weitesten Sinne des Wortes
    figurative/literal \sense übertragene/wörtliche [o ursprüngliche] Bedeutung
    to make \sense einen Sinn ergeben
    this passage doesn't make \sense diese Passage ist unverständlich
    to make \sense [out] of sth sich dat auf etw akk einen Reim machen
    I've read the letter twice, but I can't make any \sense of it ich habe den Brief zweimal gelesen, aber ich kann mir keinen Reim darauf machen
    6. (way) Art f
    in a \sense in gewisser Weise
    we are in no \sense obliged to agree to this wir sind in keiner Weise verpflichtet, dem zuzustimmen
    in every \sense in jeder Hinsicht
    to have a \sense of fun Spaß verstehen können
    it was just a jokewhere's your \sense of fun? das war doch nur ein Scherz — verstehst du keinen Spaß?
    to have a \sense of humour Sinn für Humor haben
    \sense of helix MATH Schraubensinn m
    \sense of rotation TECH Drehrichtung f, Drehsinn m
    II. vt
    to \sense sb/sth jdn/etw wahrnehmen
    to \sense that... spüren, dass...
    he \sensed that his guests were bored er spürte, dass seine Gäste sich langweilten
    could you \sense what was likely to happen? hattest du eine Ahnung von dem, was passieren konnte?
    to \sense sth COMPUT etw prüfen
    to \sense sb's anger jds Wut spüren
    to \sense danger Gefahr wittern
    * * *
    [sens]
    1. n
    1) (bodily) Sinn m

    sense of hearingGehörsinn m, Gehör nt

    2) pl (= right mind) Verstand m

    no man in his senses... — kein einigermaßen vernünftiger Mensch...

    to frighten sb out of his senses —

    his senses were deranged by... — er war durch... völlig verstört

    to come to one's senses — zur Vernunft or Besinnung kommen, Vernunft annehmen

    3) (= feeling) Gefühl nt

    a sense of occasion — das Gefühl, dass etwas Besonderes stattfindet

    4) (= instinct, appreciation) Sinn m

    his sense for what is appropriatesein Gefühl nt or Gespür nt dafür, was angebracht ist

    /justice — Farben-/Gerechtigkeitssinn m

    5)

    (= good sense) (common) sense — gesunder Menschenverstand

    haven't you sense enough or enough sense to stop when you're tired? — bist du nicht vernünftig genug aufzuhören, wenn du müde bist?

    he had the (good) sense to... — er war so vernünftig or klug or gescheit und...

    you should have had more sense than to... — du hättest vernünftiger sein sollen und nicht...

    there is no sense in that — das hat keinen Sinn, es ist zwecklos

    there's a lot of sense in that — das hat Hand und Fuß, das ist ganz vernünftig

    what's the sense of or in doing this? — welchen Sinn hat es denn, das zu tun?

    there is no sense in doing that — es ist zwecklos or sinnlos, das zu tun

    there's some sense in what he says — was er sagt, ist ganz vernünftig

    there's some sense in doing that — es wäre ganz vernünftig, das zu tun

    6)

    it doesn't make sense doing it that way/spending or to spend all that money —

    why did he decide that? – I don't know, it doesn't make sense — warum hat er das beschlossen? – ich weiß es nicht, es ist mir unverständlich or es macht keinen Sinn

    it makes good financial/political sense to... — aus finanzieller/politischer Sicht gesehen ist es sehr vernünftig, zu...

    he/his theory doesn't make sense — er/seine Theorie ist völlig unverständlich

    it all makes sense now —

    it doesn't make sense, the jewels were there a minute ago — das ist ganz unverständlich, die Juwelen waren doch eben noch da

    to make sense of sth — etw verstehen, aus etw schlau werden (inf)

    you're not making sense (in explaining sth, in plans, intentions etc) — das ist doch Unsinn; (in behaviour, attitude) ich werde aus Ihnen nicht schlau (inf)

    now you're making sense (in explaining sth) — jetzt verstehe ich, was Sie meinen; (in plans, intentions etc) das ist endlich eine vernünftige Idee

    7) (= meaning) Sinn m no pl

    it has three distinct senses —

    8)

    (= way, respect) in a sense — in gewisser Hinsicht, gewissermaßen

    in what sense? —

    2. vt
    fühlen, spüren

    I could sense someone there in the dark — ich fühlte or spürte, dass da jemand in der Dunkelheit war

    * * *
    sense [sens]
    A s
    1. Sinn m, Sinnesorgan n:
    sense of hearing (sight, smell, taste, touch) Gehör-(Gesichts-, Geruchs-, Geschmacks-, Tast)sinn;
    I’ve lost my sense of taste ich schmecke nichts mehr; sixth A 1
    2. pl Sinne pl, (klarer) Verstand:
    in (out of) one’s senses bei (von) Sinnen;
    lose ( oder take leave of) one’s senses den Verstand verlieren;
    bring sb to their senses jemanden wieder zur Besinnung bringen;
    recover ( oder come to) one’s senses wieder zur Besinnung oder Vernunft kommen
    3. fig Vernunft f, Verstand m:
    a man of sense ein vernünftiger oder kluger Mensch;
    have the sense to do sth so klug sein, etwas zu tun;
    do have some sense! sei doch vernünftig!; common sense
    4. Sinne pl, Empfindungsvermögen n
    5. Gefühl n:
    a) Empfindung f (of für):
    sense of achievement Erfolgserlebnis n;
    sense of pain Schmerzgefühl;
    sense of security Gefühl der Sicherheit; frustration 5 b, 5 c, 5 d, outrage A 3, well-being 2
    b) Ahnung f, unbestimmtes Gefühl
    6. Sinn m, Gefühl n ( beide:
    of für):
    sense of balance Gleichgewichtssinn, -empfinden n, -gefühl;
    sense of beauty Schönheitssinn;
    sense of decency ( oder decorum) Anstand(sgefühl) m(n);
    sense of duty Pflichtbewusstsein n, -gefühl;
    a keen sense of justice ein ausgeprägter Gerechtigkeitssinn;
    sense of responsibility Verantwortungsgefühl, -bewusstsein n;
    sense of shame Schamgefühl;
    7. Sinn m, Bedeutung f:
    in every sense in jeder Hinsicht;
    in a sense in gewissem Sinne;
    in the good and in the bad sense im guten wie im bösen oder schlechten Sinn
    8. Sinn m, (etwas) Vernünftiges:
    what is the sense of doing this? was hat es für einen Sinn, das zu tun?;
    is there a sense in which …? könnte man vielleicht sagen, dass …?;
    it makes sense es macht Sinn, es hat Hand und Fuß, es klingt plausibel;
    it does not make sense es hat oder macht keinen Sinn;
    I could make no sense of it ich konnte mir darauf keinen Reim machen;
    talk sense vernünftig reden
    9. ( besonders allgemeine) Ansicht, Meinung f, Auffassung f:
    take the sense of the meeting die Meinung der Versammlung einholen
    10. MATH Richtung f:
    sense of rotation Drehsinn m
    11. Funkpeilung: (Peil)Seite f
    B v/t
    1. empfinden, fühlen, spüren, ahnen
    2. IT
    a) abtasten
    b) abfragen
    3. besonders US umg kapieren
    * * *
    1. noun

    sense of smell/touch/taste — Geruchs-/Tast-/Geschmackssinn, der

    2) in pl. (normal state of mind) Verstand, der
    3) (consciousness) Gefühl, das

    sense of responsibility/guilt — Verantwortungs-/Schuldgefühl, das

    4) (practical wisdom) Verstand, der

    there's a lot of sense in what he's saying — was er sagt, klingt sehr vernünftig

    have the sense to do something — so vernünftig sein, etwas zu tun

    what is the sense of or in doing that? — was hat man davon od. wozu soll es gut sein, das zu tun?

    make somebody see sense — jemanden zur Vernunft bringen; see also common sense; good I 1.

    5) (meaning) Sinn, der; (of word) Bedeutung, die

    in the strict or literal sense — im strengen od. wörtlichen Sinn

    in every sense [of the word] — in jeder Hinsicht

    in a or one sense — in gewisser Hinsicht od. Weise

    it does not make sense to do thates ist Unsinn od. unvernünftig, das zu tun

    it makes [a lot of] sense — (is [very] reasonable) es ist [sehr] sinnvoll

    2. transitive verb
    spüren; [Tier:] wittern
    * * *
    n.
    Empfindung f.
    Gefühl -e n.
    Sinn -e m.
    Verstand -¨e m.
    Wahrnehmung f. v.
    abfühlen v.
    abtasten v.
    empfinden v.
    fühlen v.
    wahrnehmen v.

    English-german dictionary > sense

  • 4 usual

    'ju:ʒuəl
    (done, happening etc most often; customary: Are you going home by the usual route?; There are more people here than usual; Such behaviour is quite usual with children of that age; As usual, he was late.) habitual, acostumbrado, común
    usual adj habitual / de siempre
    as usual como de costumbre / como siempre
    our team lost, as usual nuestro equipo perdió, como de costumbre

    usual adjetivo usual, normal
    usual adjetivo usual, common, normal ' usual' also found in these entries: Spanish: acostumbrada - acostumbrado - común - consabida - consabido - costumbre - flema - habitual - normal - ordinaria - ordinario - proveedor - proveedora - provincia - residir - siempre - variar - achaques - corriente - cuándo - rigor English: as - ordinary - procedure - usual - and - bad - belong - big - early - either - few - first - general - good - habit - habitual - heavy - high - large - late - or - routine - saint - self - third - up
    tr['jʊːʒʊəl]
    1 usual, habitual, normal, corriente
    1 lo habitual, lo usual
    2 familiar (drink etc) lo de siempre
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    as usual como de costumbre, como siempre
    usual ['ju:ʒʊəl] adj
    1) normal: usual, normal
    2) customary: acostumbrado, habitual, de costumbre
    3) ordinary: ordinario, típico
    adj.
    acostumbrado, -a adj.
    corriente adj.
    frecuente adj.
    general adj.
    habitual adj.
    ordinario, -a adj.
    usual adj.

    I 'juːʒuəl
    adjective <method/response/comment> acostumbrado, habitual, usual; <time/place/route> de siempre, de costumbre; <clothes/appearance> de costumbre

    as usual — como de costumbre, como siempre

    as is usual at these eventscomo suele ocurrir or pasar en estas ocasiones

    it is usual for candidates to apply in writinglo normal or habitual es que los candidatos hagan su solicitud por escrito


    II
    noun (colloq) (no pl) (drink, order)

    my o the usual, please — lo de siempre, por favor

    ['juːʒʊǝl]
    1.
    ADJ (=customary) [method, answer] acostumbrado, habitual, usual; [place, time, excuse] de siempre

    to come earlier than usual — venir más temprano que de costumbre, venir antes de la hora acostumbrada

    it's usual to give a tipes costumbre or (esp LAm) se acostumbra dar una propina

    as (per) usual — como de costumbre, como siempre

    it's not usual for her to be late — no suele llegar tarde

    it is not our usual practice to allow this — no acostumbramos or solemos permitir esto

    it's not contagious in the usual sense of the word — no es contagioso en el sentido normal de la palabra

    he came home late, drunk, the usual thing — llegó a casa tarde y borracho, lo de siempre

    boil the potatoes in the usual waycueza las patatas como de costumbre or como siempre

    2.
    N

    the usual please! *(=drink) lo de siempre, por favor

    * * *

    I ['juːʒuəl]
    adjective <method/response/comment> acostumbrado, habitual, usual; <time/place/route> de siempre, de costumbre; <clothes/appearance> de costumbre

    as usual — como de costumbre, como siempre

    as is usual at these eventscomo suele ocurrir or pasar en estas ocasiones

    it is usual for candidates to apply in writinglo normal or habitual es que los candidatos hagan su solicitud por escrito


    II
    noun (colloq) (no pl) (drink, order)

    my o the usual, please — lo de siempre, por favor

    English-spanish dictionary > usual

  • 5 sense

    English-Russian scientific dictionary > sense

  • 6 sense

    1) ощупывать

    2) смысл
    3) уточненное состояние
    4) <naut.> знак направления
    5) чувство
    6) ощущение
    7) здравый смысл
    8) разум
    9) значение
    10) ощущать
    11) понимать
    12) контрольный провод
    common sense
    – in a narrow sense
    – in a restricted sense
    – in the restricted sense
    – in the usual sense
    make sense
    sense a hole
    sense antenna
    sense line
    sense of depth
    sense of integration
    sense of rotation
    sense of smell
    sense point
    sense wire

    continuous in the extended senseобобщенно-непрерывный


    in the broad sense of the wordв широком смысле слова


    magnetize in the same senseнамагничивать одноименно


    stable in the sense ofустойчивый по

    Англо-русский технический словарь > sense

  • 7

    , [full] , τό, is, when thus written,
    A demonstr. Pronoun.
    B in [dialect] Att., definite or prepositive Article.
    C in [dialect] Ep., the so-called postpositive Article, = relative Pronoun, ὅς, ἥ, ὅ.—The nom. masc. and fem. sg. and pl., , , οἱ, αἱ, have no accent in codd. and most printed books, exc. when used as the relative ; but , , οἱ, αἱ differ only in writing from ὃ, ἣ, οἳ, αἳ ; the nom. forms of the article are said by Hdn.Gr.1.474 to be oxytone, and by A.D.Pron.8.7 not to be enclitic. The forms τῶν, τοῖς, ταῖς were barytone (i. e. τὼν, τοὶς, ταὶς ) in [dialect] Aeol. acc. to Aristarch. ap. A.D.Synt.51.26. For οἱ, αἱ some dialects (not Cypr., cf. Inscr.Cypr.135.30H., nor Cret., cf.Leg.Gort. 5.28, nor Lesbian, cf. Alc.81, Sapph.Supp.5.1 ) and Hom. have τοί, ταί (though οἱ, αἱ are also found in Hom.): other Homeric forms are gen. sg. τοῖο, gen. and dat. dual

    τοῖιν Od.18.34

    , al.: gen. pl. fem. τάων [pron. full] [ᾱ], dat. τοῖσι, τῇς and τῇσι, never ταῖσι or ταῖς in Hom.— In [dialect] Dor. and all other dialects exc. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion. the fem. forms preserve the old [pron. full] instead of changing it to η, hence [dialect] Dor. etc. ἁ, τάν, τᾶς ; the gen. pl. τάων contracts in many dialects to τᾶν ; the gen. sg. is in many places τῶ, acc. pl. τώς, but Cret., etc., τόνς (Leg.Gort.7.7, al.) or τός (ib.3.50, al.) ; in Lesbian [dialect] Aeol. the acc. pl. forms are τοὶς, ταὶς, IG12(2).645 A13, B62 ; dat. pl. τοῖς, ταῖς (or τοὶς, ταὶς, v. supr.), ib.645 A8, ib.1.6 ; ταῖσι as demonstr., Sapph. 16. The [dialect] Att. Poets also used the [dialect] Ion. and [dialect] Ep. forms τοῖσι, ταῖσι ; and in Trag. we find τοὶ μέν.., τοὶ δέ.., for οἱ μέν.., οἱ δέ.., not only in lyr., as A.Pers. 584, Th. 295, 298 ;

    οἱ μέν.. τοὶ δ' S.Aj. 1404

    (anap.) ; but even in a trimeter, A.Pers. 424. In [dialect] Att. the dual has usu. only one gender, τὼ θεώ (for τὰ θεά) And.1.113 sq. ; τὼ πόλεε Foed. ap. Th.5.23 ;

    τὼ ἡμέρα X.Cyr.1.2.11

    ;

    τὼ χεῖρε Id.Mem.2.3.18

    ;

    τοῖν χεροῖν Pl.Tht. 155e

    ;

    τοῖν γενεσέοιν Id.Phd. 71e

    ;

    τοῖν πολέοιν Isoc.4.75

    (τά S.Ant. 769, Ar.Eq. 424, 484,

    ταῖν Lys.19.17

    , Is.5.16, etc. have been corrected) ; in Arc. the form τοῖς functions as gen. dual fem.,

    μεσακόθεν τοῖς κράναιυν Schwyzer664.8

    (Orchom., iv B.C.):—in Elean and [dialect] Boeot. , ἡ (ἁ), τό, with the addition of -ί, = ὅδε, ἥδε, τόδε, nom.pl. masc. τυΐ the following men, Schwyzer485.14 (Thespiae, iii B.C.), al., cf. infr. VIII. 5. (With , ἁ, cf. Skt. demonstr. pron. sa, sā, Goth. sa, sō, ONorse sá, sú, Old Lat. acc. sum, sam (Enn.): —with τό [from Τόδ] cf. Skt. tat (tad), Lat. is-tud, Goth. pata: —with τοί cf. Skt. te, Lith. tĩe, OE. pá, etc.:—with τάων cf. Skt. tāsām, Lat. is-tarum:— the origin of the relative ὅς, ἥ, ὅ (q. v.) is different.)
    A , , τό, DEMONSTR. PRONOUN, that, the oldest and in Hom. the commonest sense: freq. also in Hdt. (1.86,5.35,al.), and sts. in Trag. (mostly in lyr., A.Supp. 1047, etc.; in trimeters, Id.Th. 197, Ag.7, Eu. 174 ; τῶν γάρ.., τῆς γάρ.., Id.Supp. 358, S.OT 1082 ; seldom in [dialect] Att. Prose, exc. in special phrases, v. infr. VI, VII):
    I joined with a Subst., to call attention to it, ὁ Τυδεΐδης he—Tydeus' famous son, Il. 11.660; τὸν Χρύσην that venerable man Chryses, I.II: and so with Appellat., Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων N.— thataged man, 7.324 ; αἰετοῦ.. τοῦ θηρητῆρος the eagle, that which is called hunter, 21.252, al. ; also to define and give emphasis, τιμῆς τῆς Πριάμου for honour, namely that of Priam, 20.181 ; οἴχετ' ἀνὴρ ὤριστος a man is gone, and he the best, 11.288, cf. 13.433, al.: sts. with words between the Pron. and Noun,

    αὐτὰρ ὁ αὖτε Πέλοψ 2.105

    ;

    τὸν Ἕκτορι μῦθον ἐνίσπες 11.186

    , cf. 703, al.:—different from this are cases like Il.1.409 αἴ κέν πως ἐθέλῃσιν ἐπὶ Τρώεσσιν ἀρῆξαι, τοὺς δὲ κατὰ πρύμνας τε καὶ ἀμφ' ἅλα ἔλσαι Ἀχαιούς if he would help the Trojans, but drive those back to the ships— I mean the Achaeans, where Ἀχ. is only added to explain τούς, cf. 1.472, 4.20, 329, al.
    II freq. without a Subst., he, she, it,

    ὁ γὰρ ἦλθε Il.1.12

    , al.
    III placed after its Noun, before the Relat. Prons., ἐφάμην σὲ περὶ φρένας ἔμμεναι ἄλλων, τῶν ὅσσοι Λυκίην ναιετάουσι far above the rest, above those to wit who, etc., Il.17.172 ; οἷ' οὔ πώ τιν' ἀκούομεν οὐδὲ παλαιῶν, τάων αἳ πάρος ἦσαν.. Ἀχαιαί such as we have not heard tell of yet even among the women of old, those women to wit who.., Od.2.119, cf. Il.5.332 ;

    θάλαμον τὸν ἀφίκετο, τόν ποτε τέκτων ξέσσεν Od.21.43

    , cf. 1.116, 10.74 :—for the [dialect] Att. usage v. infr.
    IV before a Possessive Pron. its demonstr. force is sts. very manifest, φθίσει σε τὸ σὸν μένος that spirit of thine, Il.6.407, cf. 11.608 ; but in 15.58, 16.40, and elsewh. it is merely the Art.
    V for cases in which the Homeric usage approaches most nearly to the Attic, v. infr. B. init.
    VI ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.. without a Subst., in all cases, genders, and numbers, Hom., etc.: sts. in Opposition, where ὁ μέν prop. refers to the former, ὁ δέ to the latter ; more rarely ὁ μέν the latter,

    ὁ δέ

    the former,

    Pl.Prt. 359e

    , Isoc.2.32,34: sts. in Partition, the one.., the other.., etc.—The Noun with it is regularly in gen. pl., being divided by the ὁ μέν.., ὁ δέ.., into parts,

    ἠΐθεοι καὶ παρθένοι.., τῶν δ' αἱ μὲν λεπτὰς ὀθόνας ἔχον, οἱ δὲ χιτῶνας εἵατο Il.18.595

    ;

    τῶν πόλεων αἱ μὲν τυραννοῦνται, αἱ δὲ δημοκρατοῦνται, αἱ δὲ ἀριστοκρατοῦνται Pl.R. 338d

    , etc.: but freq. the Noun is in the same case, by a kind of apposition,

    ἴδον υἷε Δάρητος, τὸν μὲν ἀλευάμενον τὸν δὲ κτάμενον Il.5.28

    , cf. Od.12.73, etc.: so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., S.Ant. 22, etc. ;

    πηγὴ ἡ μὲν εἰς αὐτὸν ἔδυ, ἡ δὲ ἔξω ἀπορρεῖ Pl.Phdr. 255c

    ; if the Noun be collective, it is in the gen. sg.,

    ὁ μὲν πεπραμένος ἦν τοῦ σίτου, ὁ δὲ ἔνδον ἀποκείμενος D.42.6

    : sts. a Noun is added in apposition with ὁ μέν or

    ὁ δέ, ὁ μὲν οὔτασ' Ἀτύμνιον ὀξέϊ δουρὶ Ἀντίλοχος.., Μάρις δὲ.. Il.16.317

    -19, cf. 116 ;

    τοὺς μὲν τὰ δίκαια ποιεῖν ἠνάγκασα, τοὺς πλουσίους, τοὺς δὲ πένητας κτλ. D.18.102

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 501a, etc.
    2 when a neg. accompanies ὁ δέ, it follows δέ, e.g.

    τὰς γοῦν Ἀθήνας οἶδα τὸν δὲ χῶρον οὔ S.OC24

    ;

    τὸν φιλόσοφον σοφίας ἐπιθυμητὴν εἶναι, οὐ τῆς μὲν τῆς δ' οὔ, ἀλλὰ πάσης Pl.R. 475b

    ;

    οὐ πάσας χρὴ τὰς δόξας τιμᾶν, ἀλλὰ τὰς μὲν τὰς δ' οὔ· οὐδὲ πάντων, ἀλλὰ τῶν μὲν τῶν δ' οὔ Id.Cri. 47a

    , etc.
    3 ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.. is used in Prose, when the Noun to which refers is left indefinite,

    ἔλεγον ὁ μέν τις τὴν σοφίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν.., ὁ δέ τις καὶ τὸ κάλλος X.Cyr.3.1.41

    ;

    νόμους.. τοὺς μὲν ὀρθῶς τιθέασιν τοὺς δέ τινας οὐκ ὀρθῶς Pl.R. 339c

    , cf. Phlb. 13c.
    4 on τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., or τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., v. infr. VIII.4.
    5 ὁ μέν is freq. used without a corresponding

    ὁ δέ, οἱ μὲν ἄρ' ἐσκίδναντο.., Μυρμιδόνας δ' οὐκ εἴα ἀποσκίδνασθαι Il.23.3

    , cf. 24.722, Th.8.12, etc.: also folld. by

    ἀλλά, ἡ μὲν γάρ μ' ἐκέλευε.., ἀλλ' ἐγὼ οὐκ ἔθελον Od.7.304

    ; by ἄλλος δέ, Il.6.147, etc. ;

    τὸν μὲν.., ἕτερον δέ Ar.Av. 843

    , etc. ;

    ὁ μέν.., ὃς δέ.. Thgn.205

    (v.l. οὐδέ): less freq. ὁ δέ in the latter clause without ὁ μέν preceding, τῇ ῥα παραδραμέτην φεύγων, ὁ δ' ὄπισθε διώκων (for ὁ μὲν φεύγων) Il.22.157 ;

    σφραγῖδε.. χρυσοῦν ἔχουσα τὸν δακτύλιον, ἡ δ' ἑτέρα ἀργυροῦν IG22.1388.45

    , cf.

    μέν D.

    III ;

    γεωργὸς μὲν εἷς, ὁ δὲ οἰκοδόμος, ἄλλος δέ τις ὑφαντής Pl.R. 369d

    , cf. Tht. 181d.
    6 ὁ δέ following μέν sts. refers to the subject of the preceding clause,

    τοῦ μὲν ἅμαρθ', ὁ δὲ Λεῦκον.. βεβλήκει Il. 4.491

    ;

    τὴν μὲν γενομένην αὐτοῖσι αἰτίην οὐ μάλα ἐξέφαινε, ὁ δὲ ἔλεγέ σφι Hdt.6.3

    , cf. 1.66,6.9, 133,7.6 : rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    ἐπεψήφιζεν αὐτὸς ἔφορος ὤν· ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔφη διαγιγνώσκειν τὴν βοήν Th.1.87

    ;

    ἔμενον ὡς κατέχοντες τὸ ἄκρον· οἱ δ' οὐ κατεῖχον X.An.4.2.6

    : this is different from ὁ δέ in apodosi, v. infr. 7 ; also from passages in which both clauses have a common verb, v. ὅ γε 11.
    7 ὁ δέ is freq. used simply in continuing a narrative, Il.1.43, etc.; also used by Hom. in apodosi after a relat., v. ὅδε 111.3.
    VII the following usages prevailed in [dialect] Att. Prose,
    1 in dialogue, after καί, it was usual to say in nom. sg. masc. καὶ ὅς ; in the other cases the usual forms of the Art. were used (v.

    ὅς A.

    II.I and cf. Skt. sas, alternat. form of sa) ; so, in acc.,

    καὶ τὸν εἰπεῖν Pl.Smp. 174a

    , cf. X.Cyr.1.3.9, etc.; also in Hdt.,

    καὶ τὴν φράσαι 6.61

    , al.
    2 ὁ καὶ ὁ such and such,

    τῇ καὶ τῇ ἀτιμίᾳ Pl.Lg. 721b

    : but mostly in acc.,

    καί μοι κάλει τὸν καὶ τόν Lys.1.23

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 784d ;

    τὰ καὶ τὰ πεπονθώς D.21.141

    , cf. 9.68 ;

    τὸ καὶ τό Id.18.243

    ; ἀνάγκη ἄρα τὸ καὶ τό it must then be so and so, Arist.Rh. 1401a4, cf. 1413a22 ; but τὰ καὶ τά now one thing, now another, of good and bad,

    τὸν δ' ἀγαθὸν τολμᾶν χρὴ τά τε καὶ τὰ φέρειν Thgn.398

    , cf. Pi.P.5.55,7.20, al.;

    τῶν τε καὶ τῶν καιρόν Id.O. 2.53

    ; so πάντα τοῦ μετρίου μεταβαλλόμενα ἐπὶ τὰ καὶ ἐπὶ τά, of excess and defect, Hp.Acut.46 ; cf. A. VI.8.
    VIII abs. usages of single cases,
    1 fem. dat. τῇ, of Place, there, on that spot, here, this way, that way, Il.5.752, 858, al.: folld. by ᾗ, 13.52, etc.: also in Prose,

    τὸ μὲν τῇ, τὸ δὲ τῇ X.Ath.2.12

    .
    b with a notion of motion towards, that way, in that direction, Il.10.531,11.149, 12.124 ;

    τῇ ἴμεν ᾗ.. 15.46

    ;

    δελφῖνες τῇ καὶ τῇ ἐθύνεον ἰχθυάοντες Hes.Sc. 210

    :—only poet.
    c of Manner,

    τῇ περ τελευτήσεσθαι ἔμελλεν

    in this way, thus,

    Od.8.510

    .
    d repeated, τῇ μέν.., τῇ δέ.., in one way.., in another.., or partly.., partly.., E.Or. 356, Pl.Smp. 211a, etc.: without

    μέν, τῇ μᾶλλον, τῇ δ' ἧσσον Parm.8.48

    .
    e relat., where, by which way, only [dialect] Ep., as Il.12.118, Od.4.229.
    2 neut. dat. τῷ, therefore, on this account, freq. in Hom., Il.1.418, 2.254, al. (v. infr.): also in Trag., A.Pr. 239, S.OT 510 (lyr.) ; in Prose,

    τῷ τοι.. Pl.Tht. 179d

    , Sph. 230b.
    b thus, so, Il.2.373, 13.57, etc.: it may also, esp. when εἰ precedes, be translated, then, if this be so, on this condition, Od.1.239,3.224, 258,al., Theoc.29.11.—In Hom. the true form is prob. τῶ, as in cod. A, or τώ, cf. A.D.Adv.199.2.
    3 neut. acc. τό, wherefore, Il.3.176, Od.8.332, al., S.Ph. 142(lyr.) ; also τὸ δέ abs., but the fact is.., Pl.Ap. 23a, Men. 97c, Phd. 109d, Tht. 157b, R. 340d, Lg. 967a ; even when the τό refers to what precedes, the contrast may lie not in the thing referred to, but in another part of the sentence (cf. supr. VI. 6),

    τὸ δ' ἐπὶ κακουργίᾳ.. ἐπετήδευσαν Th.1.37

    ;

    τὸ δὲ.. ἡμῖν μᾶλλον περιέσται Id.2.89

    ; φασὶ δέ τινες αὐτὸν καὶ τῶν ἑπτὰ σοφῶν γεγονέναι· τὸ δὲ οὐκ ἦν but he was not, Nic.Dam.58J.
    4 τὸ μέν.., τὸ δέ.., partly.., partly.., or on the one hand.., on the other.., Th.7.36, etc., cf.Od.2.46 ; more freq. τὰ μέν.., τὰ δέ.., Hdt.1.173, S.Tr. 534, etc.; also

    τὰ μέν τι.., τὰ δέ τι.. X.An.4.1.14

    ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Luc.Macr.14

    ;

    τὰ μέν.., τὸ δὲ πλέον.. Th.1.90

    : sts. without τὸ μέν.. in the first clause,

    τὸ δέ τι Id.1.107

    ,7.48 : rarely of Time, τὰ μὲν πολλὰ.., τέλος δέ several times.. and finally, Hdt.3.85.
    5 of Time, sts. that time, sts. this (present) time, συνμαχία κ' ἔα ἑκατὸν ϝέτεα, ἄρχοι δέ κα τοΐ (where it is possible, but not necessary, to supply ϝέτος) SIG9.3 (Olympia, vi B.C.): so with Preps., ἐκ τοῦ, [dialect] Ep. τοῖο, from that time, Il.1.493,15.601.
    b πρὸ τοῦ, sts. written προτοῦ, before this, aforetime, Hdt.1.103, 122,5.55, A.Ag. 1204, Ar.Nu.5, etc.;

    ἐν τῷ πρὸ τοῦ χρόνῳ Th.1.32

    , cf. A.Eu. 462 ;

    τὸ πρὸ τοῦ D.S.20.59

    .
    6 ἐν τοῖς is freq. used in Prose with Superlatives, ἐν τοῖσι θειότατον a most marvellous thing, Hdt.7.137 ; ἐν τοῖς πρῶτοι the very first, Th.1.6, etc.; ἐν τοῖσι πρῶτος ( πρώτοις codd.) Pherecr.145.4 ; [Ζεὺς] Ἔρωτά τε καὶ Ἀνάγκην ἐν τοῖς πρῶτα ἐγέννησεν first of all, Aristid. Or.43(1).16, cf. 37(2).2: when used with fem. Nouns, ἐν τοῖς remained without change of gender, ἐν τοῖς πλεῖσται δὴ νῆες the greatest number of ships, Th.3.17; ἐν τοῖς πρώτη ἐγένετο (sc. ἡ στάσις) ib.82 : also with Advbs.,

    ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα Id.8.90

    , Pl.Cri. 52a, Plu.2.74e, 421d, 723e, Brut.6, 11,al., Paus.1.16.3, etc.;

    ἐν τοῖς χαλεπώτατα Th.7.71

    ;

    τὴν Αἴγυπτον ἐν τοῖς μάλιστα μελάγγειον οὖσαν Plu.2.364c

    : in late Prose, also with Positives,

    ἐν τοῖς παράδοξον Aristid.Or.48(24).47

    codd.; with

    πάνυ, ἐν τοῖς πάνυ D.H.1.19

    , cf. 66 ( ἐν ταῖς πάνυ f.l. 4.14,15).
    B , , τό, THE DEFINITE ARTICLE, the, to specify individuals: rare in this signf. in the earliest Gr., becoming commoner later. In Hom. the demonstr. force can generally be traced, v. supr. A. I, but the definite Art. must be recognized in places like Il.1.167,7.412, 9.309, 12.289, Od.19.372 : also when joined to an Adj. to make it a Subst.,

    αἰὲν ἀποκτείνων τὸν ὀπίστατον

    the hindmost man,

    Il.11.178

    ;

    τὸν ἄριστον 17.80

    ;

    τὸν δύστηνον 22.59

    ;

    τὸν προὔχοντα 23.325

    ; τῷ πρώτῳ.., τῷ δευτέρῳ.., etc., ib. 265sq. ; also in

    τῶν ἄλλων 2.674

    , al.: with Advs.,

    τὸ πρίν 24.543

    , al.;

    τὸ πάρος περ 17.720

    ;

    τὸ πρόσθεν 23.583

    ; also τὸ τρίτον ib. 733 ;

    τὰ πρῶτα 1.6

    ,al.; τὸ μὲν ἄλλο for the rest, 23.454 ;

    ἀνδρῶν τῶν τότε 9.559

    .—The true Art., however, is first fully established in fifth-cent. [dialect] Att., whilst the demonstr. usage disappears, exc. in a few cases, V. A. VI-VIII.—Chief usages, esp. in [dialect] Att.
    I not only with common Appellats., Adjs., and Parts., to specify them as present to sense or mind, but also freq. where we use the Possessive Pron.,

    τὸ κέαρ ηὐφράνθην Ar.Ach.5

    ; τὴν κεφαλὴν κατεάγην my head was broken, And.1.61, etc. ; τοὺς φίλους ποιούμεθα we make our friends, S.Ant. 190 ; τὰς πόλεις ἔκτιζον they began founding their cities, Th.1.12;

    οὐχ ὑπὲρ τὴν οὐσίαν ποιούμενοι τοὺς παῖδας Pl.R. 372b

    .
    b omitted with pr.nn.and freq. with Appellats. which require no specification, as θεός, βασιλεύς, v. θεός 1.1, βασιλεύς III ; ἐμ πόλει in the Acropolis, IG12.4.1, al.: but added to pr. nn., when attention is to be called to the previous mention of the person, as Th. (3.70 ) speaks first of Πειθίας and then refers to him repeatedly as ὁ Π.; cf. Θράσυλος in Id.8.104, with ὁ Θ. ib. 105 ; or when the person spoken of is to be specially distinguished, Ζεύς, ὅστις ὁ Ζεύς whoever this Zeus is, E.Fr. 480 ; and therefore properly omitted when a special designation follows, as Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος: seldom in Trag. with pr. nn., save to give pecul. emphasis, like Lat. ille, ὁ Λάϊος, ὁ Φοῖβος, S.OT 729, El.35, etc.: later, however, the usage became very common (the Homeric usage of with a pr. n. is different, v. A.I).
    c Aristotle says Σωκράτης meaning the historical Socrates, as in SE183b7, PA642a28, al., but ὁ Σωκράτης when he means the Platonic Socrates, as Pol.1261a6, al.: so with other pr.nn., EN1145a21, 1146a21, al.
    d for Σαῦλος ὁ καὶ Παῦλος, etc., v. καί B.2.
    2 in a generic sense, where the individual is treated as a type,

    οἷς ὁ γέρων μετέῃσιν.. λεύσσει Il.3.109

    ;

    πονηρὸν ὁ συκοφάντης D.18.242

    , etc.
    b freq. with abstract Nouns,

    ἥ τε ἐλπὶς καὶ ὁ ἔρως Th.3.45

    , etc.
    3 of outstanding members of a class, ὁ γεωγράφος, ὁ κωμικός, ὁ ποιητής, ὁ τεχνικός, v. γεωγράφος, κωμικός, ποιητής, τεχνικός.
    4 with infs., which thereby become Substs., τὸ εἴργειν prevention, Pl.Grg. 505b ; τὸ φρονεῖν good sense, S.Ant. 1348(anap.), etc.: when the subject is expressed it is put between the Art.and the inf., τὸ θεοὺς εἶναι the existence of gods, Pl.Phd. 62b ; τὸ μηδένα εἶναι ὄλβιον the fact or statement that no one is happy, Hdt.1.86.
    5 in neut. before any word or expression which itself is made the object of thought, τὸ ἄνθρωπος the word or notion man ; τὸ λέγω the word λέγω ; τὸ μηδὲν ἄγαν the sentiment 'ne quid nimis', E.Hipp. 265(lyr.); τὸ τῇ αὐτῇ the phrase τῇ αὐτῇ, Pl.Men. 72e : and so before whole clauses, ἡ δόξα.. περὶ τοῦ οὕστινας δεῖ ἄρχειν the opinion about the question 'who ought to rule', Id.R. 431e ; τὸ ἐὰν μένητε παρ' ἐμοί, ἀποδώσω the phrase 'I will give back, if.. ', X.Cyr. 5.1.21, cf. Pl.R. 327c, etc.;

    τοὺς τοῦ τί πρακτέον λογισμούς D.23.148

    ; τὸ ὀλίγοι the term few, Arist.Pol. 1283b11.
    6 before relat. clauses, when the Art. serves to combine the whole relat. clause into one notion, τῇ ᾗ φὴς σὺ σκληρότητι the harshness you speak of, Pl.Cra. 435a ; τὸν ἥμερον καρπόν.., καὶ τὸν ὅσος ξύλινος (i.e. καὶ τὸν καρπὸν ὅσος ἂν ᾖ ξύλινος) Id.Criti. 115b ;

    τῶν ὅσοι ἂν.. ἀγαθοὶ κριθῶσιν Id.R. 469b

    ;

    ἐκ γῆς καὶ πυρὸς μείξαντες καὶ τῶν ὅσα πυρὶ καὶ γῇ κεράννυται Id.Prt. 320d

    , cf. Hyp.Lyc.2 ;

    ταύτην τε τὴν αἰτίαν καὶ τὴν ὅθεν ἡ κίνησις Arist.Metaph. 987a8

    ;

    τὸν ὃς ἔφη Lys.23.8

    : hence the relat., by attraction, freq. follows the case of the Art., τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν τε καὶ ὑμῖν, i.e. τοῖς οὖσιν οἷοι ἡμεῖς καὶ ὑμεῖς, X.HG2.3.25, etc.
    7 before Prons.,
    a before the pers. Prons., giving them greater emphasis, but only in acc.,

    τὸν ἐμέ Pl.Tht. 166a

    ,Phlb. 20b ; τὸν.. σὲ καὶ ἐμέ ib. 59b ;

    τὸν αὑτόν Id.Phdr. 258a

    ; on ὁ αὐτός, v. αὐτός 111.
    b before the interrog. Pron. (both τίς and ποῖος), referring to something before, which needs to be more distinctly specified, A.Pr. 251, Ar. Pax 696 ; also τὰ τί; because οἷα went before, ib. 693. Of τίς only the neut. is thus used (v.supr.): ποῖος is thus used not only in neut. pl., τὰ ποῖα; E.Ph. 707 ; but also in the other genders, ὁ ποῖος; ib. 1704 ; τῆς ποίας μερίδος; D.18.64 ; τοῖς ποίοις.. ; Arist.Ph. 227b1.
    c with τοιοῦτος, τοιόσδε, τηλικοῦτος, etc., the Art. either makes the Pron. into a Subst.,

    ὁ τοιοῦτος

    that sort of person,

    X.Mem.4.2.21

    , etc.; or subjoins it to a Subst. which already has an Art.,

    τὴν ἀπολογίαν τὴν τοιαύτην D.41.13

    .
    8 before ἅπας, Pi.N.1.69, Hdt.3.64, 7.153 (s.v.l.), S.OC 1224 (lyr.), D.18.231, etc.; also τὸν ἕνα, τὸν ἕνα τοῦτον, Arist.Pol. 1287b8, 1288a19 : on its usage with ἕκαστος, v. sub voc.; and on οἱ ἄλλοι, οἱ πολλοί, etc., v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    πολύς 11.3

    , etc.
    9 the Art. with the [comp] Comp. is rare, if follows, S.Ant. 313, OC 796.
    II elliptic expressions:
    1 before the gen. of a pr.<*>., to express descent, son or daughter, Θουκυδίδης ὁ Ὀλόρου (sc. υἱός) Th.4.104 ; Ἑλένη ἡ τοῦ Διός (sc. θυγάτηρ) E.Hel. 470 : also to denote other relationships, e.g. brother, Lys.32.24, Alciphr.2.2.10 ; ἡ Σμικυθίωνος Μελιστίχη M. the wife of S., Ar.Ec.46 ; Κλέαρχος καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου Cl. and his men, X.An.1.2.15 ; ὁ τοῦ Ἀντιγένεος the slave of A., Hp.Hum.20.
    2 generally, before a gen. it indicates a wider relation, as τὸ τῶν νεῶν, τὸ τῶν Ἑρμῶν, the matter of the ships, the affair of the Hermae, Th.4.23,6.60 ; τὰ τοῦ Ἀρριβαίου πράσσειν to promote the interests of Arrhibaeus, Id.4.83, cf. 6.89, etc.; τὸ τῆς τύχης,=ἡ τύχη, Id.4.18 ; τὰ τῆς τύχης accidents, chance events, ib.55 ; τὰ γὰρ φθιτῶν τοῖς ὁρῶσι κόσμος performance of the rites due to the dead befits the living, E.Supp.78(lyr.); τὰ τῶν θεῶν that which is destined by the gods, S.Tr. 498(lyr.): hence with neut. of Possessive Pron., τὸ ἐμόν, τὸ σόν, what regards me or thee, my or thy business or interests, S.Aj. 124, El. 251, etc.: and with gen. of 3 pers.,

    τὸ τῆσδε E.Hipp.48

    . But τό τινος is freq. also, a man's word or saying, as

    τὸ τοῦ Σόλωνος Hdt.1.86

    ; τὸ τοῦ Ὁμήρου as Homer says, Pl.Tht. 183e ; also τά τινος so-and-so's house, Ar.V. 1432, D.54.7, Theoc.2.76, Herod.5.52, Ev.Luc.2.49.
    3 very freq. with cases governed by Preps.. αἱ ἐκ τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες the ships from Zacynthus, Th.4.13 ; οἱ ἀμφί τινα, οἱ περί τινα, such an one and his followers, v. ἀμφί c.1.3, περί c.1.2 ; also τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾴκης the Thrace-ward district, Th.1.59, al.; τὰ ἀπὸ τοῦ καταστρώματος matters on deck, Id.7.70 ; τὰ ἀπ' Ἀλκιβιάδου the proposals of Alcibiades, Id.8.48 ; τὰ ἀπὸ τῆς τύχης the incidents of fortune, Id.2.87, etc.
    4 on μὰ τόν, μὰ τήν, etc., v. μά IV.
    5 in elliptical phrases, ἐπορευόμην τὴν ἔξω τείχους (sc. ὁδόν) Pl.Ly. 203a ; ἡ ἐπὶ θανάτῳ (sc. στολή, δέσις), v. θάνατος; κατὰ τὴν ἐμήν (sc. γνώμην), v. ἐμός 11.4 ; ἡ αὔριον (sc. ἡμέρα), v. αὔριον; ἡ Λυδιστί (sc. ἁρμονία) Arist.Pol. 1342b32, etc.: freq. with Advs., which thus take an adj. sense, as , , τὸ νῦν;

    ὁ οἴκαδε πλοῦς Th.1.52

    ; οἱ τότε, οἱ ἔπειτα (sc. ἄνθρωποι), ib.9,10, etc. ; but τό stands abs. with Advs. of time and place, when one cannot (as in the preceding instances) supply a Subst., as

    κἀκεῖσε καὶ τὸ δεῦρο E.Ph. 266

    , cf.[315] (lyr.);

    ὁ μὲν τὸ κεῖθεν, ὁ δὲ τὸ κεῖθεν Id.Or. 1412

    (lyr.): rarely abs. in gen., ἰέναι τοῦ πρόσω to go forward, X.An.1.3.1 ;

    τοῦ προσωτάτω δραμεῖν S.Aj. 731

    .
    C as RELATIVE PRONOUN in many dialects ; both in nom. sg. masc. ὅ, as

    κλῦθί μοι, ὃ χθιζὸς θεὸς ἤλυθες Od.2.262

    , cf. 1.300, al. ;

    Ἔρως, ὃ κατ' ὀμμάτων στάζεις πόθον E.Hipp. 526

    (lyr.);

    Ἄδωνις, ὃ κἠν Ἀχέροντι φιλεῖται Theoc.15.86

    ; ὃ ἐξορύξη he who banishes him, Schwyzer679.12,25 ([place name] Cyprus) ; and in the forms beginning with τ, esp. in Hom. (Od.4.160, al.), Hdt.1.7, al.: also in [dialect] Ion. Poets,

    ἐν τῷ κάθημαι Archil.87.3

    , cf. Semon.7.3, Anacr.86 (prob.), Herod.2.64, al.: freq. in Trag.,

    τῆς S.OC 1258

    , Tr. 381, 728, E.Alc. 883 (anap.);

    τῷ S.Ph.14

    ;

    τήν Id.OC 747

    , Tr.47, El. 1144 ; τό Id.OT 1427 ; τῶν ib. 1379, Ant. 1086.—Never in Com. or [dialect] Att. Prose:—[dialect] Ep. gen. sg.

    τεῦ Il.18.192

    (s.v.l.).
    D CRASIS OF ARTICLE:
    a [dialect] Att. , , τό, with [pron. full] make , as ἁνήρ, ἁλήθεια, τἀγαθόν, τᾄτιον; so οἱ, αἱ, τά, as ἅνδρες, τἀγαθά; also τοῦ, τῷ, as τἀγαθοῦ, τἀγαθῷ: , τό, οἱ, before e gives ου, οὑξ, οὑπί, οὑμός, τοὔργον, οὑπιχώριοι, etc.; also τοῦ, as τοὐμοῦ, τοὐπιόντος; but ἅτερος, θάτερον ([pron. full] ¯ ?ὁX?ὁX), [dialect] Ion. οὕτερος, τοὔτερον (v. ἕτερος), [dialect] Att. fem. ἡτέρα, dat. θητέρᾳ (v. ἕτερος); τῷ loses the iota, τὠμῷ, τὠπιόντι: , τό, before ο gives ου, as Οὁδυσσεύς, Οὑλύμπιος, τοὔνομα: , τό, etc., before αυ gives ᾱυ, αὑτός, ταὐτό, ταὐτῷ (freq. written ἁτός, etc. in Inscrr. and Pap.); so τὰ αὐτά=ταὐτά, αἱ αὐταί= αὑταί: before εὐ gives ηὑ, as ηὑλάβεια: τῇ before gives θη, as θἠμέρᾳ: τὸ before gives θου, as θοὔδωρ for τὸ ὕδωρ.
    b other dialects: in their treatment of crasis these follow the local laws of contraction, hence, e.g., [dialect] Dor. ὡξ from

    ὁ ἐξ Theoc.1.65

    , ὥλαφος from ὁ ἔλαφος ib. 135 ; [dialect] Ion. ᾡσυμνήτης from ὁ αἰς- SIG57.45 (Milet., v B.C.) ; ὡυτή from

    ἡ αὐτή Heraclit.60

    , etc.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) >

  • 8 GÖRA

    ð, also spelt görva, giörva, geyra, giora, gera: prop. gøra, not gra (the ø was sounded nearly as y or ey), so that the g is to be sounded as an aspirate, however the word is spelt; and the insertion of i or j (giöra, gjöra), which is usual in mod. writing, and often occurs in old, is phonetic, not radical, and göra and gjöra represent the same sound. The word in the oldest form had a characteristic v, and is spelt so on the Runic stones in the frequent Runic phrase, gaurva kubl, Baut., and Danske Runemind. passim; but also now and then in old Icel. MSS., e. g. the Kb. of Sæm. (cited from Bugge’s Edit.), gorva, Am. 75, Skv. 1. 34, 3. 20, Hm. 123, Og. 29; gerva, Am. 64, Bkv. 3; giorva, Rm. 9; giorfa, 28; gorvir, Hkv. Hjörv. 41; gørvom, Hým. 6; gorviz, Am. 35; gerviz, Merl. 2. 89:—this characteristic v has since been dropped, and it is usually spelt without it in MSS., gora, Hým. 1, Og. 23, Ls. 65; gera, Am. 85; gorir, Hm. 114: the pret. always drops the v, gorþi, Hym. 21; gorðo or gorþo, fecerunt, Hm. 142, Am. 9; gorðumz, Hðm. 28; gerþi, Am. 74; gerþit, 26:—with i inserted, Rm. 9, 22; giordu, 11; in the Mork. freq. giavra. The ö is still sounded in the east of Icel., whereas gera is the common form in speech, gjöra in writing:—the old pres. indic. used by the poets and in the laws is monosyllabic görr, with suffixed negative, görr-a, Hkr. i. (in a verse); mod. bisyllabic görir, which form is also the usual one in the Sagas:—the old part. pass. was görr or gerr, geyrr, Fms. ix. 498, x. 75, where the v was kept before a vowel, and is often spelt with f, gorvan, gorvir, and gorfan, gorfir: dat. so-goro or so-guru adverbially = sic facto: the mod. part. gjörðr, gerðr, görðr, as a regular part. of the 2nd weak conjugation, which form occurs in MSS. of the 15th century, e. g. Bs. i. 877, l. 21. [This is a Scandin. word; Dan. gjöre; Swed. göra; Old Engl. and Scot. gar, which is no doubt of Scandin. origin, the Saxon word being do, the Germ. thun, neither of which is used in the Scandin.; the word however is not unknown to the Teut., though used in a different sense; A. S. gervan and gearvjan = parare; O. H. G. karwan; Germ. gerben, garben, but esp. the adj. and adv. gar, vide above s. v. gör-.] To make, to do; the Icel. includes both these senses.
    A. To make:
    I. to build, work, make, etc.; göra himin ok jörð, 623. 36, Hom. 100; göra hús, to build a house, Fms. xi. 4, Rb. 384; göra kirkju, Bjarn. 39; göra skip, N. G. L. i. 198; göra langskip, Eg. 44; göra stólpa, Al. 116; göra tól (= smíða), Vsp. 7; göra (fingr)-gull, Bs. i. 877; göra haug, to build a cairn, Eg. 399; göra lokhvílu, Dropl. 27; göra dys, Ld. 152; göra kistu ( coffin), Eg. 127; göra naust, N. G. L. i. 198; göra jarðhús, Dropl. 34; göra veggi, Eg. 724: also, göra bók, to write a book, Íb. 1, Rb. 384; göra kviðling, to make a song, Nj. 50; göra bréf, to draw up a deed ( letter), Fms. ix. 22; göra nýmæli, to frame a law, Íb. 17.
    2. adding prep.; göra upp, to repair, rebuild, restore, Fb. ii. 370; göra upp Jórsala-borg, Ver. 43; göra upp skála, Ld. 298; göra upp leiði, to build up a grave.
    II. to make, prepare, get ready; göra veizlu, drykkju, brúðkaup, erfi, and poët. öl, öldr, to make a feast, brew bridal ale, Fs. 23, Fms. xi. 156, Dropl. 6, Am. 86; göra seið, blót, to perform a sacrifice, Ld. 152; göra bú, to set up a house, Grág. i. 185, Ld. 68; göra eld, to make a fire, Fs. 100, K. Þ. K. 88; göra rekkju, to make one’s bed, Eg. 236; göra upp hvílur, Sturl. ii. 124; göra graut, to make porridge, Eg. 196, N. G. L. i. 349; göra drykk, to make a drink, Fms. i. 8; göra kol, or göra til kola, to make charcoal, Ölk. 35.
    III. in somewhat metaph. phrases; göra ferð, to make a journey, Fms. x. 281; görði heiman för sína, he made a journey from home, Eg. 23; göra sinn veg, to make one’s way, travel, Mar.; göra uppreisn, to make an uprising, to rebel, Rb. 384, Fms. ix. 416; göra úfrið, to make war, 656 C. 15; göra sátt, göra frið, to make peace, Hom. 153, Bs. i. 24; göra féskipti, Nj. 118; göra tilskipan, to make an arrangement, Eg. 67; göra ráð sitt, to make up one’s mind, Nj. 267, Fms. ix. 21; göra hluti, to cast lots, Fms. x. 348.
    2. to make, give, pay, yield; göra tíund, to pay tithes, Hom. 180; hann skal göra Guði tíunda hlut verðsins, id.; göra ölmusu, to give alms, 64; göra ávöxt, to yield fruit, Greg. 48; gefa né göra ávöxt, Stj. 43; göra konungi skatt eða skyld, Fms. xi. 225.
    3. to contract; göra vináttu, félagskap, to contract friendship, Nj. 103, Eg. 29; göra skuld, to contract a debt, Grág. i. 126: göra ráð með e-m, to take counsel with, advise one, Eg. 12; göra ráð fyrir, to suppose, Nj. 103, Fms. ix. 10; göra mun e-s, to make a difference, i. 255, Eb. 106.
    4. to make, make up, Lat. efficere; sex tigir penninga göra eyri, sixty pence make an ounce, Grág. i. 500, Rb. 458.
    5. to grant, render; göra kost, to make a choice, to grant, Nj. 130, Dropl. 6, Fms. xi. 72, (usually ellipt., kostr being understood); vil ek at þér gerit kostinn, Nj. 3; ok megit þér fyrir því göra ( grant) honum kostinn, 49, 51; göra e-m lög, to grant the law to one, 237; göra guðsifjar, to make ‘gossip’ with one, to be one’s godfather, Fms. ii. 130.
    6. special usages; göra spott, háð, gabb, … at e-u, to make sport, gibes, etc. at or over a thing, Fms. x. 124; göra iðran, to do penance, Greg. 22; göra þakkir, to give thanks, Hom. 55; göra róm at máli e-s, to cheer another’s speech, shout hear, hear! var görr at máli hans mikill rómr ok góðr, his speech was much cheered, Nj. 250,—a parliamentary term; the Teutons cheered, the Romans applauded (with the hands), cp. Tacit. Germ.
    7. with prepp.; gera til, to make ready or dress meat; láta af ( to kill) ok göra til ( and dress), K. Þ. K. 80, Ísl. ii. 83, 331, Fs. 146, 149, Bjarn. 31, Finnb. 228; göra til nyt, to churn milk, K. Þ. K. 78; göra til sverð, to wash and clean the sword, Dropl. 19; máttu þeir eigi sjá, hversu Þorvaldr var til gerr, how Th. got a dressing, Nj. 19.
    β. göra at e-u, to mend, make good, put right (at-görð), ek skal at því gera, Fms. xi. 153, Eg. 566, Nj. 130: to heal, Bárð. 171, Eg. 579, Grág. i. 220; göra at hesti, K. Þ. K. 54, Nj. 74: göra við e-u, vide B. II.
    8. adding acc. of an adj., part., or the like; göra mun þat margan höfuðlausan, Nj. 203; göra mikit um sik, to make a great noise, great havoc, Fb. i. 545, Grett. 133, Fms. x. 329; göra e-n sáttan, to reconcile one, Grág. i. 336; göra sér e-n kæran, to make one dear to oneself, Hkr. i. 209; göra sik líkan e-m, to make oneself like to another, imitate one, Nj. 258; göra sik góðan, to make oneself good or useful, 74, 78; göra sik reiðan, to take offence, 216; göra sér dælt, to make oneself at home, take liberties, Ld. 134, Nj. 216; göra langmælt, to make a long speech, Sks. 316; göra skjót-kjörit, to make a quick choice, Fms. ii. 79; göra hólpinn, to ‘make holpen,’ to help, x. 314; göra lögtekit, to make a law, issue a law, xi. 213, Bs. i. 37; hann gerði hann hálshöggvinn, he had him beheaded, Fms. ix. 488, v. l.; ok görðu þá handtekna alla at minsta kosti, Sturl. i. 40; várir vöskustu ok beztu menn era görfir handteknir, 41.
    β. göra sér mikit um e-t, to make much of, admire, Eg. 5, Fms. x. 254, 364; göra e-t at ágætum, to make famous, extol a thing, vii. 147; göra at orðum, to notice as remarkable, Fas. i. 123; göra at álitum, to take into consideration, Nj. 3; göra sér úgetið at e-u, to be displeased with, Ld. 134; göra vart við sik, to make one’s presence noticed, Eg. 79; göra sér mikit, lítið fyrir, to make great, small efforts, Finnb. 234; göra sér í hug, to brood over; hann gerði sér í hug at drepa jarl, Fs. 112; göra sér í hugar lund, to fancy, think: göra af sér, to exert oneself, ef þú gerir eigi meira af þér um aðra leika, Edda 32; hvárt hann var með Eiríki jarli, eðr görði hann annat af sér, or what else he was making of himself, Fms. xi. 157.
    9. phrases, gera fáleika á sik, to feign, make oneself look sad, Nj. 14; esp. adding upp, gera sér upp veyki, to feign sickness, (upp-gerð, dissimulation); göra sér til, to make a fuss, (hence, til-gerð, foppishness.)
    B. To do:
    I. to do, act; allt þat er hann gerir síðan ( whatever he does), þat á eigandi at ábyrgjask, Gþl. 190; þér munut fátt mæla eðr gera, áðr yðr munu vandræði af standa, i. e. whatsoever you say or do will bring you into trouble, Nj. 91; göra e-t með harðfengi ok kappi, 98; ger svá vel, ‘do so well,’ be so kind! 111; gerit nú svá, góði herra (please, dear lord!), þiggit mitt heilræði, Fms. vii. 157: and in mod. usage, gerið þér svo vel, gerðu svo vel, = Engl. please, do! sagði, at hann hafði með trúleik gört, done faithfully, Eg. 65; göra gott, to do good; göra íllt, to do evil, (góð-görð, íll-görð); ok þat var vel gört, well done, 64; geyrða ek hotvetna íllt, I did evil in all things, Niðrst. 109; hefir hann marga hluti gört stór-vel til mín, he has done many things well towards me, I have received many great benefits at his hands, Eg. 60: with dat., svá mikit gott sem jarl hefir mér gert, Nj. 133; þér vilda ek sízt íllt göra, I would least do harm to thee, 84: göra fúlmennsku, to do a mean act, 185; göra vel við e-n, to do well to one, Fs. 22; göra stygð við e-n, to offend one, Fms. x. 98; göra sæmiliga til e-s, to do well to one, Ld. 62, Nj. 71; göra sóma e-s, to do honour to one, Fms. vii. 155; göra e-m gagn, to give help to one, Nj. 262; göra e-m sæmd, skomm, to do ( shew) honour, dishonour, to one, 5, Fms. x. 43; göra háðung, xi. 152; göra styrk, to strengthen one, ix. 343; göra e-m skapraun, to tease one; göra ósóma, Vápn. 19; göra skaða ( scathe), Eg. 426; göra óvina-fagnað, to give joy to one’s enemies, i. e. to do just what they want one to do, Nj. 112; göra til skaps e-m, to conform to one’s wishes, 80; gerum vér sem faðir vár vill, let us do as our father wishes, 198; vel má ek gera þat til skaps föður míns at brenna inni með honum, id.; göra at skapi e-s, id., 3; var þat mjök gert móti mínu skapi, Fms. viii. 300; gera til saka við e-n, to offend, sin against one, Nj. 80; gera á hluta e-s, to wrong one, Vígl. 25; göra ílla fyrir sér, to behave badly, Fms. vii. 103.
    II. adding prep.; göra til e-s, to deserve a thing (cp. til-görð, desert, behaviour); hvat hafðir þú til gört, what hast thou done to deserve it? Nj. 130; framarr en ek hefi til gört, more than I have deserved, Fms. viii. 300; ok hafit þér Danir heldr til annars gört, ye Danes have rather deserved the reverse, xi. 192, Hom. 159:—göra eptir, to do after, imitate, Nj. 90:—göra við e-u (cp. við-görð, amendment), to provide for, amend, ok mun úhægt vera at göra við forlögum þeirra, Ld. 190; er úhægt at göra við ( to resist) atkvæðum, Fs. 22; ok mun ekki mega við því gera, Nj. 198:—göra af við e-n (cp. af-görð, evil doing), to transgress against one, ek hefi engan hlut af gört við þik, Fms. vii. 104, viii. 241; ok iðrask nú þess er hann hefir af gert, 300; göra af við Guð, to sin against God, Hom. 44.
    2. special usages; göra … at, to do so and so; spurði, hvat hann vildi þá láta at gera, he asked what he would have done, Nj. 100; hann gerði þat eina at, er hann átti, he did only what be ought, 220; þeir Flosi sátu um at rengja, ok gátu ekki at gert, F. tried, and could do nothing, 115, 242; þér munut ekki fá at gert, fyrr en …, 139; Flosi ok hans menn fengu ekki at gert, 199; mikit hefir þú nú at gert, much hast thou now done ( it is a serious matter), 85; er nú ok mikit at gert um manndráp siðan, 256; hann vildi taka vöru at láni, ok göra mikit at, and do great things, Ld. 70; Svartr hafði höggit skóg ok gert mikit at, Nj. 53; slíkt gerir at er sölin etr, so it happens with those who eat seaweed, i. e. that (viz. thirst) comes of eating seaweed, Eg. 605.
    β. göra af e-u, to do so and so with a thing; hvat hafið ér gert af Gunnari, Njarð. 376; ráð þú draumana, vera má at vér gerim af nokkut, may be that we may make something out of it, Ld. 126; gör af drauminum slíkt er þér þykkir líkligast, do with the dream ( read it) as seems to thee likeliest, Ísl. ii. 196: göra við e-n, to do with one; þá var um rætt, hvað við þá skyldi göra, what was to be done with them? Eg. 232; ærnar eru sakir til við Egil, hvat sem eg læt göra við hann, 426; eigi veit ek hvat þeir hafa síðan við gört, 574: göra fyrir e-t, to provide; Jón var vel fjáreigandi, ok at öllu vel fyrir gört, a wealthy and well-to-do man, Sturl. iii. 195; þótt Björn sé vel vígr maðr, þá er þar fyrir gört, því at …, but that is made up, because …: fyrir göra (q. v.), to forfeit.
    C. METAPH. AND SPECIAL USAGES:
    I. to do, help, avail; nú skulum vér ganga allir á vald jarlsins, því at oss gerir eigi annat, nothing else will do for us, Nj. 267; þat mun ekki gera, that wont do, 84; en ek kann ekki ráð til at leggja ef þetta gerir ekki, Fms. ii. 326; konungr vill þat eigi, þvi at mér gerir þat eigi ( it will not do for me) at þér gangit hér upp, x. 357; þat gerir mér ekki, at þér gangit á Orminn, … en hitt má vera at mér komi at gagni, ii. 227; þóttisk þá vita, at honum mundi ekki gera ( it would do nothing) at biðja fyrir honum, Fb. i. 565; engum gerði við hann at keppa, 571; ekki gerði þeim um at brjótask, Bárð. 10 new Ed.; sagða ek yðr eigi, at ekki mundi gera at leita hans, Sks. 625; hvat gerir mér nú at spyrja, Stj. 518; ekki gerir at dylja, no use hiding it, Fbr. 101 new Ed.; ætla þat at fáir þori, enda geri engum, Band. 7; bæði var leitað til annarra ok heima, ok gerði ekki, but did no good, 4; hét hann þeim afarkostum, ok gerði þat ekki, but it did no good, Fms. ii. 143.
    II. to send, despatch, cp. the Engl. to ‘do’ a message; hann gerði þegar menn frá sér, Eg. 270; hann hafði gört menn sex á skóginn fyrir þá, 568; þá gerði Karl lið móti þeim, Fms. i. 108; jarl gerði Eirík at leita Ribbunga, ix. 314; hann gerði fram fyrir sik Álf á njósn, 488; hann gerði menn fyrir sér at segja konunginum kvámu sína, x. 10; hleypi-skúta var gör norðr til Þrándheims, vii. 206; jafnan gerði jarl til Ribbunga ok drap menn af þeim, ix. 312; vilja Ósvífrs-synir þegar gera til þeirra Kotkels, despatch them to slay K., Ld. 144; skulu vér nú göra í mót honum, ok láta hann engri njósn koma, 242:—göra eptir e-m, to send after one, Nero bað göra eptir postulunum ok leiða þangat, 656 C. 26; nú verðr eigi eptir gört at miðjum vetri, Grág. i. 421; frændr Bjarnar létu göra eptir (Germ. abholen) líki hans, Bjarn. 69; síðan gerðu þeir til klaustrs þess er jómfrúin var í, Fms. x. 102:—gera e-m orð, njósn, to do a message to one; hann gerði orð jörlum sínum, Eg. 270; ætluðu þeir at göra Önundi njósn um ferðir Egils, 386, 582; vóru þangat orð gör, word was sent thither, Hkr. ii. 228.
    III. with infin. as an auxiliary verb, only in poetry and old prose (laws); ef hón gerði koma, if she did come, Völ. 5; gerðit vatn vægja, Am. 25; gramr gørr-at sér hlífa, he does not spare himself, Hkr. i. (in a verse); gerðut vægjask, id., Fs. (in a verse); hann gerðisk at höggva, Jb. 41; görðir at segja, Bkv. 15; görðisk at deyja, Gkv. 1. 1: in prose, eigi gerir hugr minn hlægja við honum, Fas. i. 122; góðir menn göra skýra sitt mál með sannsögli, 677. 12; Aristodemus görði eigi enn at trúa, Post.: esp. in the laws, ef þeir göra eigi ganga í rúm sín, Grág. i. 8; ef goðinn gerr eigi segja, 32; ef hann gerr eigi í ganga, 33; ef þeir göra eigi hluta meðr sér, 63; ef dómendr göra eigi dæma, 67; ef dómendr göra eigi við at taka, id.; ef goðinn gerr eigi ( does not) nefna féráns-dóm, 94; nú göra þeir menn eigi úmaga færa, 86; ef þeir göra eigi nefna kvöðina af búanum, Kb. ii. 163; ef þeir göra eigi segja, hvárt …, Sb. ii. 52; nú gerr sá eigi til fara, Kb. ii. 96; göra eigi koma, 150; ef hann gerr eigi kjósa, § 113.
    IV. a law term, göra um, or gera only, to judge or arbitrate in a case; fékksk þat af, at tólf menn skyldu göra um málit, Nj. 111; villt þú göra um málit, 21; bjóða mun ek at göra um, ok lúka upp þegar görðinni, 77; mun sá mála-hluti várr beztr, at góðir menn geri um, 88; málin vóru lagið í gerð, skyldu gera um tólf menn, var þá gert um málin á þingi, var þat gert, at … (follows the verdict), 88; vil ek at þú sættisk skjótt ok látir góða menn gera um …, at hann geri um ok enir beztu menn af hvárra liði lögliga til nefndir, 188; Njáll kvaðsk eigi gera mundu nema á þingi, 105; þeir kváðusk þat halda mundu, er hann gerði, id.; skaltú gera sjálfr, 58; fyrr en gert var áðr um hitt málit, 120; ek vil bjóðask til at göra milli ykkar Þórðar um mál yðar, Bjarn. 55; Þorsteinn kvað þat þó mundi mál manna, at þeir hefði góða nefnd um sættir þótt hann görði, 56; nú er þegar slegit í sætt málinu með því móti, at Áskell skal göra um þeirra í milli, Rd. 248; er nú leitað um sættir milli þeirra, ok kom svá at þeir skulu göra um málin Þorgeirr goði frá Ljósa-vatni ok Arnórr ór Reykjahlíð, sú var görð þeirra at …, 288; svá kemr at Ljótr vill at Skapti görði af hans hendi, en Guðmundr vill sjálfr göra fyrir sína hönd, skyldi Skapti gerð upp segja, Valla L. 225; eigi hæfir þat, leitum heldr um sættir ok geri Þorgeirr um mál þessi, Lv. 12; var jafnt gört sár Þórðar ok sár Þórodds, Eb. 246; þær urðu mála-lyktir at Þórðr skyldi göra um …, 24; ok vóru þá görvar miklar fésektir, 128; var leitað um sættir, ok varð þat at sætt, at þeir Snorri ok Steindórr skyldi göra um, 212; þit erut gerfir héraðs-sekir sem íllræðis-menn, Fs. 58: göra görð, Sturl. i. 63, 105: adding the fine, to fix the amount, þat er gerð mín, at ek geri verð húss ok matar, I fix the amount of the value of the house and (stolen) stores, Nj. 80; gerði Njáll hundrað silfrs, N. put it at a hundred silver pieces, 58; margir mæltu, at mikit vaeri gert, that the amount was high, id.; slíkt fégjald sem gert var, 120; vilit ér nokkut héraðs-sektir göra eða utanferðir, 189; hann dæmdi þegar, ok görði hundrað silfrs, 6l; síðan bauð Bjarni Þorkatli sætt ok sjálfdæmi, görði Bjarni hundrað silfrs, Vápn. 31; ek göri á hönd Þóri hundrað silfrs, Lv. 55; ek göri á hönd þér hundrað silfrs, id.; vilit þér, at ek göra millum ykkar? síðan görði konungr konuna til handa Þórði ok öll fé hennar, Bjarn. 17; Rafn kvað hann mikit fé annat af sér hafa gört, at eigi þætti honum þat betra, Fs. 30; Gellir görði átta hundrað silfrs, Lv. 97; fyrir þat gerði Börkr hinn digri af honum eyjarnar, B. took the isles from him as a fine, Landn. 123: adding the case as object, Gunnarr gerði gerðina, G. gave judgment in the case, Nj. 80; fyrr en gert var áðr um hitt málit, till the other case was decided, 120; þá sætt er hann görði Haraldi jarli, that settlement which he made for earl Harold, Fms. viii. 300: Flosi var görr utan ok allir brennu-menn, F. was put out ( banished) and all the burners, Nj. 251: metaph., nema þau vili annat mál á gera, unless they choose to settle it otherwise, Grág. i. 336.
    2. in the phrase, göra sekð, to make a case of outlawry, Grág. i. 118; eigi um görir sekð manns ella, else the outlawry takes no effect; en hann um görir eigi ella sekðina, else he cannot condemn him, 119.
    3. to perform; eptir-gerðar þeirrar sem hverr nennti framast at gera eptir sinn náung, Fms. viii. 103; en þat grunaði konung, at hann mundi ætla at göra eptir sumar sættir, i. e. that he had some back door to escape by, Orkn. 58 (cp. Ó. H.); allt þat er þér gerit nú fyrir þeirra sálum, id.
    V. special usages, to make allowance for; gera fóðr til fjár, to make an arbitrary allowance for, Ísl. ii. 138; hence, to suppose, en ef ek skal göra til fyrir fram ( suggest) hvat er hón (the code) segir mér, þá segi ek svá, at …, Fms. ix. 331; gera sér í hug, Fs. 112; göra sér í hugar-lund, to fancy; göra e-m getsakir, to impute to one; gera orð á e-u, to report a thing; þat er ekki orð á því geranda, ‘tis not worth talking about; eigi þarf orð at göra hjá því (‘tis not to be denied), sjálfan stólkonunginn blindaði hann, Mork. 14 (cp. Fms. vi. 168, l. c.); gera sér létt, to take a thing lightly, Am. 70; göra sér far um, to take pains; göra sér í hug, hugar-lund, to suppose.
    D. IMPERS. it makes one so and so, one becomes; hann görði fölvan í andliti, he turned pale, Glúm. 342; leysti ísinn ok görði varmt vatnið, the water became warm, 623. 34; veðr görði hvast, a gale arose, Eg. 128; hríð mikla gerði at þeim, they were overtaken by a storm, 267; þá gerði ok á hríð (acc.) veðrs, 281; féll veðrit ok gerði logn (acc.), and became calm, 372; görði þá stórt á firðinum, the sea rose high, 600; til þess er veðr lægði ok ljóst gerði, and till it cleared up, 129; um nóttina gerði á æði-veðr ok útsynning, 195; görir á fyrir þeim hafvillur, they lost their course (of sailors), Finnb. 242; mér gerir svefnhöfugt, I grow sleepy, Nj. 264; þá görði vetr mikinn þar eptir hinn næsta, Rd. 248.
    E. REFLEX, to become, grow, arise, and the like; þá görðisk hlátr, then arose laughter, Nj. 15; görðisk bardagi, it came to a fight, 62, 108; sá atburðr görðisk, it came to pass, Fms. x. 279; þau tíðendi er þar höfðu görzt, Ld. 152; gerðisk með þeim félagskapr, they entered into fellowship, Eg. 29; gerðisk svá fallit kaup, Dipl. ii. 10; Sigurðr konungr gerðisk ( grew up to be) ofstopa-maðr …, görðisk mikill maðr ok sterkr, Fms. vii. 238; hann görðisk brátt ríkr maðr ok stjórnsamr, xi. 223; Unnr görðisk þá mjök elli-móð, U. became worn with age, Ld. 12; sár þat er at ben görðisk, a law term, a wound which amounted to a bleeding wound, Nj. passim:—to be made, to become, görask konungr, to become king, Eg. 12; ok görðisk skáld hans, and became his skáld, 13; görðisk konungs hirðmaðr, 27; görask hans eigin-kona, to become his wedded wife, Fms. i. 3; at hann skyldi görask hálf-konungr yfir Dana-veldi, 83; vill Hrútr görask mágr þinn, Nj. 3; hann gerðisk síðan óvarari, he became less cautious, Fms. x. 414.
    2. with the prep. svá, to happen, come to pass so and so; svá görðisk, at …, it so happened, that …, Nj. 167; görðisk svá til, at …, Fms. x. 391; þá görðisk svá til um síðir, at…, at last it came to pass. that …, 392; enda vissi hann eigi, at þingför mundi af görask, in case he knew not that it would entail a journey to parliament, Grág. i. 46: with at added, to increase, þá görðisk þat mjök at um jarl ( it grew even worse with the earl) at hann var úsiðugr um kvenna-far, görðisk þat svá mikit, at …, it grew to such a pitch, that …, Hkr. i. 245; hence the mod. phrase, e-ð á-görist, it increases, gains, advances, esp. of illness, bad habits, and the like, never in a good sense.
    3. impers. with dat., honum gerðisk ekki mjök vært, he felt restless, Ld. 152; næsta gerisk mér kynlegt, I feel uneasy, Finnb. 236.
    4. to behave, bear oneself; Páll görðisk hraustliga í nafni Jesu, Post. 656 C. 13.
    5. to set about doing, be about; fám vetrum síðan görðisk hann vestr til Íslands, Fms. x. 415; maðr kom at honum ok spurði, hvat hann gerðisk, what he was about, Ó. H. 244; görðisk jarl til Ribbunga, Fms. ix. 312, v. l.; tveir menn görðusk ferðar sinnar, two men set out for a journey, x. 279; görðusk menn ok eigi til þess at sitja yfir hlut hans, Eg. 512; at þessir menn hafa görzk til svá mikils stórræðis, Fms. xi. 261; eigi treystusk menn at görask til við hann, Bárð. 160.
    6. (mod.) to be; in such phrases as, eins og menn nú gerast, such as people now are; eins og flestir menn gerast.
    F. PART. PASS. görr, geyrr (Fms. ix. 498, x. 75), gjörr, gerr, as adj., compar. görvari, superl. görvastr; [A. S. gearu; gare, Chaucer, Percy’s Ballads; O. H. G. garwe; Germ. gar]:—skilled, accomplished; vaskligr, at sér görr, Ld. 134; vel at sér görr, Ísl. ii. 326, Gísl. 14; gerr at sér um allt, Nj. 51; hraustir ok vel at sér görvir, Eg. 86; at engi maðr hafi gervari at sér verit en Sigurðr, Mork. 221; allra manna snjallastr í máli ok görvastr at sér, Hkr. iii. 360: the phrase, leggja görva hönd á e-t, to set a skilled hand to work, to be an adept, a master in a thing; svá hagr, at hann lagði allt á görva hönd, Fas. i. 391, (á allt görva hönd, iii. 195.)
    2. ready made, at hand; in the saying, gott er til geyrs (i. e. görs, not geirs) at taka, ‘tis good to have a thing at hand, Hkm. 17; ganga til görs, to have it ready made for one, Ld. 96; gör gjöld, prompt punishment, Lex. Poët.:—with infin., gerr at bjóða, ready to offer, Gh. 17; gervir at eiskra, in wild spirits, Hom. 11; görvar at ríða, Vsp. 24: with gen. of the thing, gerr ílls hugar, prone to evil, Hým. 9; gerr galdrs, prone to sorcery, Þd. 3; skulut þess görvir, be ready for that! Am. 55.
    II. [cp. görvi, Engl. gear], done, dressed; svá görvir, so ‘geared,’ so trussed, Am. 40.
    III. adverb. phrases, so-gurt, at soguru, so done; verða menn þat þó so-gurt at hafa, i. e. there is no redress to be had, Hrafn. 9; hafi hann so-gurt, N. G. L. i. 35, Nj. 141; kvað eigi so-gort duga, 123, v. l.; at (með) so-guru, this done, quo facto, Skv. 1. 24, 40; freq. with a notion of being left undone, re infecta. Germ. unverrichteter sache, Eg. 155, Glúm. 332, Ó. H. 202; enda siti um so-gort, and now let it stand, Skálda 166; við so-gurt, id., 655 vii. 4; á so-gurt ofan, into the bargain, Bs. i. 178, Ölk. 36, Fas. i. 85.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > GÖRA

  • 9 adversa

    ad-verto (archaic advor-), ti, sum, 3, v. a., to turn a thing to or toward a place (in this signif., without animus; mostly poet.; syn.: observare, animadvertere, videre, cognoscere).
    I.
    Lit.
    A.
    In gen., with in or dat.:

    illa sese huc advorterat in hanc nostram plateam,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 51:

    in quamcunque domus lumina partem,

    Ov. M. 6, 180; cf. id. ib. 8, 482:

    malis numen,

    Verg. A. 4, 611:

    huc aures, huc, quaeso, advertite sensus,

    Sil. 16, 213; cf. id. 6, 105.—
    B.
    Esp., a naut. t. t., to turn, direct, steer a ship to a place:

    classem in portum,

    Liv. 37, 9 Drak.:

    terrae proras,

    Verg. A. 7, 35; id. G. 4, 117 al.:

    Colchos puppim,

    Ov. H. 12, 23.— Absol.:

    profugi advertere coloni,

    landed, Sil. 1, 288;

    hence also transf. to other things: aequore cursum,

    Verg. A. 7, 196:

    pedem ripae,

    id. ib. 6, 386:

    urbi agmen,

    id. ib. 12, 555: adverti with acc. poet. for verti ad:

    Scythicas advertitur oras,

    Ov. M. 5, 649 (cf. adducor litora remis, id. ib. 3, 598, and Rudd. II. p. 327).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    Animum (in the poets and Livy also animos, rarely mentem) advertere; absol., or with adv. or ad aliquid, or alicui rei, to direct the mind, thoughts, or attention to a thing, to advert to, give attention to, attend to, to heed, observe, remark:

    si voles advortere animum, Enn. ap. Var. L. L. 7, § 89 Müll. (Trag. v. 386 Vahl.): facete advortis animum tuum ad animum meum,

    Plaut. Mil. 1, 1, 39:

    nunc huc animum advortite ambo,

    id. ib. 3, 1, 169:

    advertunt animos ad religionem,

    Lucr. 3, 54:

    monitis animos advertite nostris,

    Ov. M. 15, 140:

    animum etiam levissimis rebus adverterent,

    Tac. A. 13, 49.—With ne, when the object of attention is expressed:

    ut animum advertant, ne quos offendant,

    Cic. Off. 2, 19, 68:

    adverterent animos, ne quid novi tumultūs oriretur,

    Liv. 4, 45.—
    B.
    Animum advertere, to observe a thing by directing the mind to it, to observe, to notice, to remark, to perceive (in the class. period contracted to animadvertere, q. v.).—Constr. with two accusatives, animum advertere aliquid (where aliquid may be regarded as depending on the prep. in comp., Roby, § 1118, or on animum advertere, considered as one idea, to observe), with acc. and inf., or rel. clause (the first mode of construction, most frequent with the pronouns id, hoc, illud, etc., is for the most part ante-class., and appears in Caes., Cic., and Sall. as an archaism):

    et hoc animum advorte,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 43:

    hanc edictionem,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 10:

    haec animum te advertere par est,

    Lucr. 2, 125:

    animum adverti columellam e dumis eminentem,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 23, 65; id. Inv. 2, 51, 153:

    Postquam id animum advertit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 24; 4, 12:

    quidam Ligus animum advortit inter saxa repentīs cocleas,

    Sall. J. 93, 2. In Vitruv. once with hinc:

    ut etiam possumus hinc animum advertere,

    as we can hence perceive, Vitr. 10, 22, 262.—With the acc. and inf.:

    postquam tantopere id vos velle animum advorteram,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 8, 16:

    animum advertit magnas esse copiashostium instructas,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 18: cum animum adverteret locum relictum esse, Auct. B. Alex. 31; ib. 46.—With the rel. clause: nunc quam rem vitio dent, quaeso, animum advortite, Ter. And. prol. 8: quid ille sperare possit, animum adverte, Dolab. ap. Cic. Fam. 9, 9:

    quam multarum rerum ipse ignarus esset... animum advertit,

    Liv. 24, 48. Sometimes advertere alone = animum advertere; so once in Cicero's letters: nam advertebatur Pompeii familiares assentiri Volcatio, Fam. 1, 1 (although here, as well as almost everywhere, the readings fluctuate between advertere and animadvertere; cf. Orell. ad h. l.; animadvertebatur, B. and K.). So Verg. in the imp.:

    qua ratione quod instat, Confieri possit, paucis, adverte, docebo,

    attend! Verg. A. 4, 115.—In the histt., esp. Tac. and Pliny, more frequently:

    donec advertit Tiberius,

    Tac. A. 4, 54:

    Zenobiam advertere pastores,

    id. ib. 12, 51:

    advertere quosdam cultu externo in sedibus senatorum,

    id. ib. 13, 54:

    quotiens novum aliquid adverterat,

    id. ib. 15, 30 al.:

    hirudo quam sanguisugam appellari adverto,

    Plin. 8, 10, 10, § 29:

    ut multos adverto credidisse,

    id. 2, 67, 67, § 168. Still more rarely, advertere animo:

    animis advertite vestris,

    Verg. A. 2, 712:

    hanc scientiam ad nostros pervenisse animo adverto,

    Plin. 25, 2, 3, § 5; cf. Drak. ad Liv. 4, 27, 8.—
    C.
    To draw or turn something, esp. the attention of another, to or upon one's self (in the histt.):

    gemitus ac planctus militum aures oraque advertere,

    Tac. A. 1, 41:

    octo aquilae imperatorem advertere,

    id. ib. 2, 17: recentia veteraque odia advertit, drew them on himself, id. ib. 4, 21 al.—
    D.
    To call the attention of one to a definite act, i. e. to admonish of it, to urge to it (cf. II. A.):

    non docet admonitio, sed advertit,

    i. e. directs attention, Sen. Ep. 94:

    advertit ea res Vespasiani animum, ut, etc.,

    Tac. H. 3, 48.—
    E.
    Advertere in aliquem, for the more usual animadvertere in aliquem, to attend to one, i. e. to punish one (only in Tac.):

    in P. Marcium consules more prisco advertere,

    Tac. A. 2, 32:

    ut in reliquos Sejani liberos adverteretur,

    id. ib. 5, 9 (cf. id. Germ. 7, 3: animadvertere).—Hence,
    1.
    adversus (archaic advor-), a, um, P. a., turned to or toward a thing, with the face or front toward, standing over against, opposite, before, in front of (opp. aversus).
    A.
    In gen.:

    solem adversum intueri,

    Cic. Somn. Scip. 5:

    Iris... Mille trahens varios adverso sole colores,

    Verg. A. 4, 701; id. G. 1, 218:

    antipodes adversis vestigiis stant contra nostra vestigia,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 39: dentes adversi acuti ( the sharp front teeth) morsu dividunt escas, Cic. N. D. 2, 54:

    quod is collis, tantum adversus in latitudinem patebat, quantum etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 8 Herz. So, hostes adversi, who make front against one advancing or retreating, id. ib. 2, 24:

    L. Cotta legatus in adversum os fundā vulneratur,

    in front, Caes. B. G. 5, 35; cf. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 1; Liv. 21, 7 fin. al.; hence, vulnus adversum, a wound in front (on the contr., vulnus aversum, a wound in the back), Cic. Har. Resp. 19:

    adversis vulneribus,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 35, 4:

    judicibus cicatrices adversas ostendere,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 28:

    cicatrices populus Romanus aspiceret adverso corpore exceptas,

    id. Verr. 5, 3:

    impetus hostium adversos, Auct. B. Alex. 8: Romani advorso colle evadunt,

    ascend the hill in front, Sall. J. 52:

    adversa signa,

    Liv. 30, 8:

    legiones quas Visellius et C. Silius adversis itineribus objecerant,

    i. e. marches in which they went to meet the enemy, Tac. A. 3, 42: sed adverso fulgure ( by a flash of lightning falling directly before him) pavefactus est Nero, Suet. Ner. 48:

    armenta egit Hannibal in adversos montes,

    Quint. 2, 17, 19; cf. Lucr. 3, 1013; so Hor. S. 1, 1, 103; 2, 3, 205:

    qui timet his adversa,

    the opposite of this, id. Ep. 1, 6, 9 al. —Hence, of rivers: flumine adverso, up the stream, against the stream:

    in adversum flumen contendere,

    Lucr. 4, 423:

    adverso feruntur flumine,

    id. 6, 720; so Verg. G. 1, 201:

    adverso amne,

    Plin. 18, 6, 7, § 33;

    adverso Tiberi subvehi,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 22, 3 (opp. to secundā aquā, down stream, with the stream:

    rate in secundam aquam labente,

    Liv. 21, 47, 3); and of winds, opposed to a vessel's course, head winds, contrary winds, consequently unfavorable, adverse:

    navigationes adversis ventis praecluduntur, Auct. B. Alex. 8: adversissimi navigantibus venti,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 107.— Subst.: adversum, i, the opposite: hic ventus a septentrionibus oriens adversum tenet Athenis proficiscentibus, [p. 50] holds the opposite to those sailing from Athens, i. e. blows against them, Nep. Milt. 1 (so Nipperdey; but v. Hand, Turs. I. p. 183). — Adv.: ex adverso, also written exadverso and exadversum, opposite to, over against, ek tou enantiou:

    portus ex adverso urbi positus,

    Liv. 45, 10.—With gen.:

    Patrae ex adverso Aetoliae et fluminis Eveni,

    Plin. 4, 4, 5, § 11.—Without case:

    cum ex adverso starent classes,

    Just. 2, 14; so Suet. Caes. 39; Tib. 33.—In adversum, to the opposite side, against:

    et duo in adversum immissi per moenia currus,

    against each other, Prop. 3, 9, 23; so Gell. 2, 30; cf. Verg. A. 8, 237;

    in adversum Romani subiere,

    Liv. 1, 12; 7, 23.—
    B.
    In hostile opposition to, adverse to, unfavorable, unpropitious (opp. secundus; frequent and class.): conqueri fortunam adversam, Pac. ap. Cic. Tusc. 2, 21, 50:

    hic dies pervorsus atque advorsus mihi obtigit,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 5, 1:

    advorsus nemini,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 37:

    mentes improborum mihi infensae et adversae,

    Cic. Sull. 10:

    acclamatio,

    id. de Or. 2, 83: adversā avi aliquid facere, vet. poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 16:

    adversis auspiciis,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 64, 6:

    adversum omen,

    Suet. Vit. 8:

    adversissima auspicia,

    id. Oth. 8: adversae res, misfortune, calamity, adverse fortune:

    ut adversas res, sic secundas immoderate ferre levitatis est,

    Cic. Off. 1, 26; cf.:

    adversi casus,

    Nep. Dat. 5:

    adversae rerum undae,

    a sea of troubles, Hor. Ep. 1, 2, 22: omnia secundissima nobis, adversissima illis accidisse, Caes. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 9 (the sup. is found also in Cæs. B. C. 3, 107):

    quae magistratus ille dicet, secundis auribus, quae ab nostrum quo dicentur, adversis accipietis?

    Liv. 6, 40:

    adversus annus frugibus,

    id. 4, 12:

    valetudo adversa,

    i. e. sickness, id. 10, 32:

    adversum proelium,

    an unsuccessful engagement, id. 7, 29; cf.

    8, 31: adverso rumore esse,

    to be in bad repute, to have a bad reputation, Tac. Ann. 14, 11:

    adversa subsellia,

    on which the opposition sit, Quint. 6, 1, 39.—Sometimes met. of feeling, contrary to, hated, hateful, odious:

    quīs omnia regna advorsa sint,

    Sall. J. 83; cf. Luc. 2, 229 Bentl.— Comp.:

    neque est aliud adversius,

    Plin. 32, 4, 14, § 35.—
    * Adv.: adver-sē, self-contradictorily, Gell. 3, 16.— ad-versum, i, subst., esp. in the plur. adversa, misfortune, calamity, disaster, adversity, evil, mischief:

    advorsa ejus per te tecta sient,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 28:

    nihil adversi,

    Cic. Brut. 1, 4:

    si quid adversi accidisset,

    Nep. Alc. 8; cf. Liv. 22, 40; 35, 13:

    secunda felices, adversa magnos probant,

    Plin. Pan. 31;

    esp. freq. in Tac.: prospera et adversa pop. Rom., Ann. 1, 1: adversa tempestatum et fluctuum,

    id. Agr. 25; so id. A. 3, 24; 45; 2, 69; 4, 13 al.— Subst.: adversus, i, m., an opponent, adversary (rare):

    multosque mortalīs ea causa advorsos habeo,

    Sall. C. 52, 7.—In Quint. also once ad-versa, ae, f., subst., a female opponent or adversary: natura noverca fuerit, si facultatem dicendi sociam scelerum, adversam innocentiae, invenit, 12, 1, 2.—
    C.
    In rhet., opposed to another of the same genus, e. g. sapientia and stultitia: “Haec quae ex eodem genere contraria sunt, appellantur adversa,” Cic. Top. 11.
    3.
    adversus or adversum (archaic advor-) (like rursus and rursum, prorsus and prorsum, quorsus and quorsum), adv. and prep., denoting direction to or toward an object (syn.: contra, in with acc., ad, erga).
    A.
    Adv.: opposite to, against, to, or toward a thing, in a friendly or hostile sense:

    ibo advorsum,

    Plaut. As. 2, 2, 29:

    facito, ut venias advorsum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 3, 82:

    obsecro te, matri ne quid tuae advorsus fuas, Liv. And. ap. Non. s. v. fuam, 111, 12 (Trag. Rel. p. 3 Rib.): quis hic est, qui advorsus it mihi?

    Plaut. Men. 3, 2, 22:

    adversus resistere,

    Nep. Pelop. 1, 3:

    nemo adversus ibat,

    Liv. 37, 13, 8 al. In Plaut. and Ter. advorsum ire, or venire, to go to meet; also of a slave, to go to meet his master and bring him from a place (hence adversitor, q. v.):

    solus nunc eo advorsum hero ex plurimis servis,

    Plaut. Most. 4, 1, 23:

    ei advorsum venimus,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 32; Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 2 Ruhnk.—
    B.
    Prep. with acc., toward or against, in a friendly or a hostile sense.
    1.
    In a friendly sense.
    (α).
    Of place, turned to or toward, opposite to, before, facing, over against: qui cotidie unguentatus adversum speculum ornetur, before the mirror, Scipio ap. Gell. 7, 12:

    adversus advocatos,

    Liv. 45, 7, 5:

    medicus debet residere illustri loco adversus aegrum,

    opposite to the patient, Cels. 3, 6:

    adversus Scyllam vergens in Italiam,

    Plin. 3, 8, 14, § 87:

    Lerina, adversum Antipolim,

    id. 3, 5, 11, § 79.—
    (β).
    In the presence of any one, before:

    egone ut te advorsum mentiar, mater mea?

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 7, 9: idque gratum fuisse advorsum te habeo gratiam, I am thankful that this is acceptable before ( to) thee, Ter. And. 1, 1, 15: paululum adversus praesentem fortitudinem mollitus, somewhat softened at such firmness (of his wife), Tac. A. 15, 63.—Hence very often with verbs of speaking, answering, complaining, etc., to declare or express one's self to any one, to excuse one's self or apologize, and the like: te oportet hoc proloqui advorsum illam mihi, Enn. ap. Non. 232, 24 (Trag. v. 385 Vahl.):

    immo si audias, quae dicta dixit me advorsum tibi,

    what he told me of you, Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 47: de vita ac morte domini fabulavere advorsum fratrem illius, Afran. ap. Non. 232, 25:

    mulier, credo, advorsum illum res suas conqueritur,

    Titin. ib. 232, 21:

    utendum est excusatione etiam adversus eos, quos invitus offendas,

    Cic. Off. 2, 19, 68; Tac. A. 3, 71.— With that to which a reply is made, to (= ad):

    adversus ea consul... respondit,

    Liv. 4, 10, 12; 22, 40, 1; cf. Drak. ad 3, 57, 1.—
    (γ).
    In comparison, as if one thing were held toward, set against, or before another (v. ad, I. D. 4.); against, in comparison with, compared to:

    repente lectus adversus veterem imperatorem comparabitur,

    will be compared with, Liv. 24, 8, 8:

    quid autem esse duo prospera bella Samnitium adversus tot decora populi Rom.,

    id. 7, 32, 8.—
    (δ).
    Of demeanor toward one, to, toward:

    quonam modo me gererem adversus Caesarem,

    Cic. Fam. 11, 27, 11:

    te adversus me omnia audere gratum est,

    i. e. on my account, on my behalf, for my advantage, id. ib. 9, 22, 15:

    lentae adversum imperia aures,

    Tac. A. 1, 65.—Esp. often of friendly feeling, love, esteem, respect toward or for one (cf. Ruhnk. ad Ter. And. 4, 1, 15; Manut. ad Cic. Fam. 9, 22; Heusing. ad Cic. Off. 1, 11, 1;

    Hab. Syn. 49): est enim pietas justitia adversus deos,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 41, 116; id. Off. 3, 6, 28:

    adhibenda est igitur quaedam reverentia adversus homines,

    id. ib. 1, 28, 99 Beier:

    sunt quaedam officia adversus eos servanda, a quibus injuriam acceperis,

    id. ib. 1, 11, 33:

    adversus merita ingratissimus,

    Vell. 2, 69, 5:

    summa adversus alios aequitas erat,

    Liv. 3, 33, 8:

    ob egregiam fidem adversus Romanos,

    id. 29, 8, 2; so id. 45, 8, 4 al.:

    beneficentiā adversus supplices utendum,

    Tac. A. 11, 17.— More rarely
    (ε).
    of the general relation of an object or act to a person or thing (v. ad, I. D. 1.), in relation, in respect, or in regard to a thing:

    epistula, ut adversus magistrum morum, modestior,

    as addressed to a censor of manners, Cic. Fam. 3, 13, 8:

    quasi adversus eos acquieverit sententiae,

    in regard to the same, Dig. 49, 1; 3, 1.—
    2.
    In a hostile sense, against (the most usual class. signif. of this word): “Contra et adversus ita differunt, quod contra, ad locum, ut: contra basilicam; adversus, ad animi motum, ut: adversus illum facio; interdum autem promiscue accipitur,” Charis. p. 207 P.; cf. Cort. ad Sall. J. 101, 8:

    advorsum legem accepisti a plurimis pecuniam,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 2, 48:

    advorsum te fabulare illud,

    against thy interest, to thy disadvantage, id. Stich. 4, 2, 11:

    stultus est advorsus aetatem et capitis canitudinem, id. ap. Fest. s. v. canitudinem, p. 47: advorsum animi tui libidinem,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 19:

    adversum leges, adversum rem publicam,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 84, § 195:

    respondebat, SI PARET, ADVERSUM EDICTUM FECISSE,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 28, §

    69: me adversus populum Romanum possem defendere,

    id. Phil. 1, 13 al. —In the histt., of a hostile attack, approach, etc.:

    gladiis districtis impetum adversus montem in cohortes faciunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 46:

    adversus se non esse missos exercitus,

    Liv. 3, 66:

    bellum adversum Xerxem moret,

    Aur. Vict. Caes. 24, 3:

    copiis quibus usi adversus Romanum bellum,

    Liv. 8, 2, 5:

    adversus vim atque injuriam pugnantes,

    id. 26, 25, 10 al.:

    T. Quintius adversus Gallos missus est,

    Eutr. 2, 2: Athenienses adversus tantam tempestatem belli duos duces deligunt, Just. 3, 6, 12 al.—Among physicians, of preventives against sickness, against (v. ad, I. A. 2.):

    adversus profusionem in his auxilium est,

    Cels. 5, 26; 6, 27 al.:

    frigidus jam artus et cluso corpore adversum vim veneni,

    Tac. A. 15, 64.— Trop.:

    egregium adversus tempestates receptaculum,

    Plin. Ep. 2, 17, 4; so id. ib. 2, 15, 36.—Hence: firmus, invictus, fortis adversus aliquid (like contra), protected against a thing, firm, fixed, secure:

    advorsum divitias animum invictum gerebat,

    Sall. J. 43, 5:

    invictus adversum gratiam animus,

    Tac. A. 15, 21:

    adversus convicia malosque rumores firmus ac patiens,

    Suet. Tib. 28:

    Adversus omnes fortis feras canis,

    Phaedr. 5, 10, 1; and in opp. sense: infirmus, inferior adversus aliquid, powerless against, unequal to:

    fama, infirmissimum adversus vivos fortes telum,

    Curt. 4, 14:

    infirmus adversum pecuniam,

    Aur. Vict. Caes. 9, 6:

    inferior adversus laborem,

    id. Epit. 40, 20.
    a.
    Adversus is rarely put after the word which it governs:

    egone ut te advorsum mentiar,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 7, 9:

    hunc adversus,

    Nep. Con. 2, 2; id. Tim. 4, 3:

    quos advorsum ierat,

    Sall. J. 101, 8.—
    b.
    It sometimes suffers tmesis:

    Labienum ad Oceanum versus proficisci jubet,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 33:

    animadvortit fugam ad se vorsum fieri,

    Sall. J. 58:

    animum advortere ad se vorsum exercitum pergere,

    id. ib. 69: ad Cordubam versus iter facere coepit, Auct. B. Hisp. 10 and 11; cf. in-versus:

    in Galliam vorsus castra movere,

    Sall. C. 56; Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 12; Traj. ap. Plin. Ep. 10, 78; the Eng. to-ward: to us ward, Psa. 40, 5; and the Gr. eis-de: eis halade, Hom. Od. 10, 351.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adversa

  • 10 adverto

    ad-verto (archaic advor-), ti, sum, 3, v. a., to turn a thing to or toward a place (in this signif., without animus; mostly poet.; syn.: observare, animadvertere, videre, cognoscere).
    I.
    Lit.
    A.
    In gen., with in or dat.:

    illa sese huc advorterat in hanc nostram plateam,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 51:

    in quamcunque domus lumina partem,

    Ov. M. 6, 180; cf. id. ib. 8, 482:

    malis numen,

    Verg. A. 4, 611:

    huc aures, huc, quaeso, advertite sensus,

    Sil. 16, 213; cf. id. 6, 105.—
    B.
    Esp., a naut. t. t., to turn, direct, steer a ship to a place:

    classem in portum,

    Liv. 37, 9 Drak.:

    terrae proras,

    Verg. A. 7, 35; id. G. 4, 117 al.:

    Colchos puppim,

    Ov. H. 12, 23.— Absol.:

    profugi advertere coloni,

    landed, Sil. 1, 288;

    hence also transf. to other things: aequore cursum,

    Verg. A. 7, 196:

    pedem ripae,

    id. ib. 6, 386:

    urbi agmen,

    id. ib. 12, 555: adverti with acc. poet. for verti ad:

    Scythicas advertitur oras,

    Ov. M. 5, 649 (cf. adducor litora remis, id. ib. 3, 598, and Rudd. II. p. 327).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    Animum (in the poets and Livy also animos, rarely mentem) advertere; absol., or with adv. or ad aliquid, or alicui rei, to direct the mind, thoughts, or attention to a thing, to advert to, give attention to, attend to, to heed, observe, remark:

    si voles advortere animum, Enn. ap. Var. L. L. 7, § 89 Müll. (Trag. v. 386 Vahl.): facete advortis animum tuum ad animum meum,

    Plaut. Mil. 1, 1, 39:

    nunc huc animum advortite ambo,

    id. ib. 3, 1, 169:

    advertunt animos ad religionem,

    Lucr. 3, 54:

    monitis animos advertite nostris,

    Ov. M. 15, 140:

    animum etiam levissimis rebus adverterent,

    Tac. A. 13, 49.—With ne, when the object of attention is expressed:

    ut animum advertant, ne quos offendant,

    Cic. Off. 2, 19, 68:

    adverterent animos, ne quid novi tumultūs oriretur,

    Liv. 4, 45.—
    B.
    Animum advertere, to observe a thing by directing the mind to it, to observe, to notice, to remark, to perceive (in the class. period contracted to animadvertere, q. v.).—Constr. with two accusatives, animum advertere aliquid (where aliquid may be regarded as depending on the prep. in comp., Roby, § 1118, or on animum advertere, considered as one idea, to observe), with acc. and inf., or rel. clause (the first mode of construction, most frequent with the pronouns id, hoc, illud, etc., is for the most part ante-class., and appears in Caes., Cic., and Sall. as an archaism):

    et hoc animum advorte,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 43:

    hanc edictionem,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 10:

    haec animum te advertere par est,

    Lucr. 2, 125:

    animum adverti columellam e dumis eminentem,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 23, 65; id. Inv. 2, 51, 153:

    Postquam id animum advertit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 24; 4, 12:

    quidam Ligus animum advortit inter saxa repentīs cocleas,

    Sall. J. 93, 2. In Vitruv. once with hinc:

    ut etiam possumus hinc animum advertere,

    as we can hence perceive, Vitr. 10, 22, 262.—With the acc. and inf.:

    postquam tantopere id vos velle animum advorteram,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 8, 16:

    animum advertit magnas esse copiashostium instructas,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 18: cum animum adverteret locum relictum esse, Auct. B. Alex. 31; ib. 46.—With the rel. clause: nunc quam rem vitio dent, quaeso, animum advortite, Ter. And. prol. 8: quid ille sperare possit, animum adverte, Dolab. ap. Cic. Fam. 9, 9:

    quam multarum rerum ipse ignarus esset... animum advertit,

    Liv. 24, 48. Sometimes advertere alone = animum advertere; so once in Cicero's letters: nam advertebatur Pompeii familiares assentiri Volcatio, Fam. 1, 1 (although here, as well as almost everywhere, the readings fluctuate between advertere and animadvertere; cf. Orell. ad h. l.; animadvertebatur, B. and K.). So Verg. in the imp.:

    qua ratione quod instat, Confieri possit, paucis, adverte, docebo,

    attend! Verg. A. 4, 115.—In the histt., esp. Tac. and Pliny, more frequently:

    donec advertit Tiberius,

    Tac. A. 4, 54:

    Zenobiam advertere pastores,

    id. ib. 12, 51:

    advertere quosdam cultu externo in sedibus senatorum,

    id. ib. 13, 54:

    quotiens novum aliquid adverterat,

    id. ib. 15, 30 al.:

    hirudo quam sanguisugam appellari adverto,

    Plin. 8, 10, 10, § 29:

    ut multos adverto credidisse,

    id. 2, 67, 67, § 168. Still more rarely, advertere animo:

    animis advertite vestris,

    Verg. A. 2, 712:

    hanc scientiam ad nostros pervenisse animo adverto,

    Plin. 25, 2, 3, § 5; cf. Drak. ad Liv. 4, 27, 8.—
    C.
    To draw or turn something, esp. the attention of another, to or upon one's self (in the histt.):

    gemitus ac planctus militum aures oraque advertere,

    Tac. A. 1, 41:

    octo aquilae imperatorem advertere,

    id. ib. 2, 17: recentia veteraque odia advertit, drew them on himself, id. ib. 4, 21 al.—
    D.
    To call the attention of one to a definite act, i. e. to admonish of it, to urge to it (cf. II. A.):

    non docet admonitio, sed advertit,

    i. e. directs attention, Sen. Ep. 94:

    advertit ea res Vespasiani animum, ut, etc.,

    Tac. H. 3, 48.—
    E.
    Advertere in aliquem, for the more usual animadvertere in aliquem, to attend to one, i. e. to punish one (only in Tac.):

    in P. Marcium consules more prisco advertere,

    Tac. A. 2, 32:

    ut in reliquos Sejani liberos adverteretur,

    id. ib. 5, 9 (cf. id. Germ. 7, 3: animadvertere).—Hence,
    1.
    adversus (archaic advor-), a, um, P. a., turned to or toward a thing, with the face or front toward, standing over against, opposite, before, in front of (opp. aversus).
    A.
    In gen.:

    solem adversum intueri,

    Cic. Somn. Scip. 5:

    Iris... Mille trahens varios adverso sole colores,

    Verg. A. 4, 701; id. G. 1, 218:

    antipodes adversis vestigiis stant contra nostra vestigia,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 39: dentes adversi acuti ( the sharp front teeth) morsu dividunt escas, Cic. N. D. 2, 54:

    quod is collis, tantum adversus in latitudinem patebat, quantum etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 8 Herz. So, hostes adversi, who make front against one advancing or retreating, id. ib. 2, 24:

    L. Cotta legatus in adversum os fundā vulneratur,

    in front, Caes. B. G. 5, 35; cf. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 1; Liv. 21, 7 fin. al.; hence, vulnus adversum, a wound in front (on the contr., vulnus aversum, a wound in the back), Cic. Har. Resp. 19:

    adversis vulneribus,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 35, 4:

    judicibus cicatrices adversas ostendere,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 28:

    cicatrices populus Romanus aspiceret adverso corpore exceptas,

    id. Verr. 5, 3:

    impetus hostium adversos, Auct. B. Alex. 8: Romani advorso colle evadunt,

    ascend the hill in front, Sall. J. 52:

    adversa signa,

    Liv. 30, 8:

    legiones quas Visellius et C. Silius adversis itineribus objecerant,

    i. e. marches in which they went to meet the enemy, Tac. A. 3, 42: sed adverso fulgure ( by a flash of lightning falling directly before him) pavefactus est Nero, Suet. Ner. 48:

    armenta egit Hannibal in adversos montes,

    Quint. 2, 17, 19; cf. Lucr. 3, 1013; so Hor. S. 1, 1, 103; 2, 3, 205:

    qui timet his adversa,

    the opposite of this, id. Ep. 1, 6, 9 al. —Hence, of rivers: flumine adverso, up the stream, against the stream:

    in adversum flumen contendere,

    Lucr. 4, 423:

    adverso feruntur flumine,

    id. 6, 720; so Verg. G. 1, 201:

    adverso amne,

    Plin. 18, 6, 7, § 33;

    adverso Tiberi subvehi,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 22, 3 (opp. to secundā aquā, down stream, with the stream:

    rate in secundam aquam labente,

    Liv. 21, 47, 3); and of winds, opposed to a vessel's course, head winds, contrary winds, consequently unfavorable, adverse:

    navigationes adversis ventis praecluduntur, Auct. B. Alex. 8: adversissimi navigantibus venti,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 107.— Subst.: adversum, i, the opposite: hic ventus a septentrionibus oriens adversum tenet Athenis proficiscentibus, [p. 50] holds the opposite to those sailing from Athens, i. e. blows against them, Nep. Milt. 1 (so Nipperdey; but v. Hand, Turs. I. p. 183). — Adv.: ex adverso, also written exadverso and exadversum, opposite to, over against, ek tou enantiou:

    portus ex adverso urbi positus,

    Liv. 45, 10.—With gen.:

    Patrae ex adverso Aetoliae et fluminis Eveni,

    Plin. 4, 4, 5, § 11.—Without case:

    cum ex adverso starent classes,

    Just. 2, 14; so Suet. Caes. 39; Tib. 33.—In adversum, to the opposite side, against:

    et duo in adversum immissi per moenia currus,

    against each other, Prop. 3, 9, 23; so Gell. 2, 30; cf. Verg. A. 8, 237;

    in adversum Romani subiere,

    Liv. 1, 12; 7, 23.—
    B.
    In hostile opposition to, adverse to, unfavorable, unpropitious (opp. secundus; frequent and class.): conqueri fortunam adversam, Pac. ap. Cic. Tusc. 2, 21, 50:

    hic dies pervorsus atque advorsus mihi obtigit,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 5, 1:

    advorsus nemini,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 37:

    mentes improborum mihi infensae et adversae,

    Cic. Sull. 10:

    acclamatio,

    id. de Or. 2, 83: adversā avi aliquid facere, vet. poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 16:

    adversis auspiciis,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 64, 6:

    adversum omen,

    Suet. Vit. 8:

    adversissima auspicia,

    id. Oth. 8: adversae res, misfortune, calamity, adverse fortune:

    ut adversas res, sic secundas immoderate ferre levitatis est,

    Cic. Off. 1, 26; cf.:

    adversi casus,

    Nep. Dat. 5:

    adversae rerum undae,

    a sea of troubles, Hor. Ep. 1, 2, 22: omnia secundissima nobis, adversissima illis accidisse, Caes. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 9 (the sup. is found also in Cæs. B. C. 3, 107):

    quae magistratus ille dicet, secundis auribus, quae ab nostrum quo dicentur, adversis accipietis?

    Liv. 6, 40:

    adversus annus frugibus,

    id. 4, 12:

    valetudo adversa,

    i. e. sickness, id. 10, 32:

    adversum proelium,

    an unsuccessful engagement, id. 7, 29; cf.

    8, 31: adverso rumore esse,

    to be in bad repute, to have a bad reputation, Tac. Ann. 14, 11:

    adversa subsellia,

    on which the opposition sit, Quint. 6, 1, 39.—Sometimes met. of feeling, contrary to, hated, hateful, odious:

    quīs omnia regna advorsa sint,

    Sall. J. 83; cf. Luc. 2, 229 Bentl.— Comp.:

    neque est aliud adversius,

    Plin. 32, 4, 14, § 35.—
    * Adv.: adver-sē, self-contradictorily, Gell. 3, 16.— ad-versum, i, subst., esp. in the plur. adversa, misfortune, calamity, disaster, adversity, evil, mischief:

    advorsa ejus per te tecta sient,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 28:

    nihil adversi,

    Cic. Brut. 1, 4:

    si quid adversi accidisset,

    Nep. Alc. 8; cf. Liv. 22, 40; 35, 13:

    secunda felices, adversa magnos probant,

    Plin. Pan. 31;

    esp. freq. in Tac.: prospera et adversa pop. Rom., Ann. 1, 1: adversa tempestatum et fluctuum,

    id. Agr. 25; so id. A. 3, 24; 45; 2, 69; 4, 13 al.— Subst.: adversus, i, m., an opponent, adversary (rare):

    multosque mortalīs ea causa advorsos habeo,

    Sall. C. 52, 7.—In Quint. also once ad-versa, ae, f., subst., a female opponent or adversary: natura noverca fuerit, si facultatem dicendi sociam scelerum, adversam innocentiae, invenit, 12, 1, 2.—
    C.
    In rhet., opposed to another of the same genus, e. g. sapientia and stultitia: “Haec quae ex eodem genere contraria sunt, appellantur adversa,” Cic. Top. 11.
    3.
    adversus or adversum (archaic advor-) (like rursus and rursum, prorsus and prorsum, quorsus and quorsum), adv. and prep., denoting direction to or toward an object (syn.: contra, in with acc., ad, erga).
    A.
    Adv.: opposite to, against, to, or toward a thing, in a friendly or hostile sense:

    ibo advorsum,

    Plaut. As. 2, 2, 29:

    facito, ut venias advorsum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 3, 82:

    obsecro te, matri ne quid tuae advorsus fuas, Liv. And. ap. Non. s. v. fuam, 111, 12 (Trag. Rel. p. 3 Rib.): quis hic est, qui advorsus it mihi?

    Plaut. Men. 3, 2, 22:

    adversus resistere,

    Nep. Pelop. 1, 3:

    nemo adversus ibat,

    Liv. 37, 13, 8 al. In Plaut. and Ter. advorsum ire, or venire, to go to meet; also of a slave, to go to meet his master and bring him from a place (hence adversitor, q. v.):

    solus nunc eo advorsum hero ex plurimis servis,

    Plaut. Most. 4, 1, 23:

    ei advorsum venimus,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 32; Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 2 Ruhnk.—
    B.
    Prep. with acc., toward or against, in a friendly or a hostile sense.
    1.
    In a friendly sense.
    (α).
    Of place, turned to or toward, opposite to, before, facing, over against: qui cotidie unguentatus adversum speculum ornetur, before the mirror, Scipio ap. Gell. 7, 12:

    adversus advocatos,

    Liv. 45, 7, 5:

    medicus debet residere illustri loco adversus aegrum,

    opposite to the patient, Cels. 3, 6:

    adversus Scyllam vergens in Italiam,

    Plin. 3, 8, 14, § 87:

    Lerina, adversum Antipolim,

    id. 3, 5, 11, § 79.—
    (β).
    In the presence of any one, before:

    egone ut te advorsum mentiar, mater mea?

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 7, 9: idque gratum fuisse advorsum te habeo gratiam, I am thankful that this is acceptable before ( to) thee, Ter. And. 1, 1, 15: paululum adversus praesentem fortitudinem mollitus, somewhat softened at such firmness (of his wife), Tac. A. 15, 63.—Hence very often with verbs of speaking, answering, complaining, etc., to declare or express one's self to any one, to excuse one's self or apologize, and the like: te oportet hoc proloqui advorsum illam mihi, Enn. ap. Non. 232, 24 (Trag. v. 385 Vahl.):

    immo si audias, quae dicta dixit me advorsum tibi,

    what he told me of you, Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 47: de vita ac morte domini fabulavere advorsum fratrem illius, Afran. ap. Non. 232, 25:

    mulier, credo, advorsum illum res suas conqueritur,

    Titin. ib. 232, 21:

    utendum est excusatione etiam adversus eos, quos invitus offendas,

    Cic. Off. 2, 19, 68; Tac. A. 3, 71.— With that to which a reply is made, to (= ad):

    adversus ea consul... respondit,

    Liv. 4, 10, 12; 22, 40, 1; cf. Drak. ad 3, 57, 1.—
    (γ).
    In comparison, as if one thing were held toward, set against, or before another (v. ad, I. D. 4.); against, in comparison with, compared to:

    repente lectus adversus veterem imperatorem comparabitur,

    will be compared with, Liv. 24, 8, 8:

    quid autem esse duo prospera bella Samnitium adversus tot decora populi Rom.,

    id. 7, 32, 8.—
    (δ).
    Of demeanor toward one, to, toward:

    quonam modo me gererem adversus Caesarem,

    Cic. Fam. 11, 27, 11:

    te adversus me omnia audere gratum est,

    i. e. on my account, on my behalf, for my advantage, id. ib. 9, 22, 15:

    lentae adversum imperia aures,

    Tac. A. 1, 65.—Esp. often of friendly feeling, love, esteem, respect toward or for one (cf. Ruhnk. ad Ter. And. 4, 1, 15; Manut. ad Cic. Fam. 9, 22; Heusing. ad Cic. Off. 1, 11, 1;

    Hab. Syn. 49): est enim pietas justitia adversus deos,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 41, 116; id. Off. 3, 6, 28:

    adhibenda est igitur quaedam reverentia adversus homines,

    id. ib. 1, 28, 99 Beier:

    sunt quaedam officia adversus eos servanda, a quibus injuriam acceperis,

    id. ib. 1, 11, 33:

    adversus merita ingratissimus,

    Vell. 2, 69, 5:

    summa adversus alios aequitas erat,

    Liv. 3, 33, 8:

    ob egregiam fidem adversus Romanos,

    id. 29, 8, 2; so id. 45, 8, 4 al.:

    beneficentiā adversus supplices utendum,

    Tac. A. 11, 17.— More rarely
    (ε).
    of the general relation of an object or act to a person or thing (v. ad, I. D. 1.), in relation, in respect, or in regard to a thing:

    epistula, ut adversus magistrum morum, modestior,

    as addressed to a censor of manners, Cic. Fam. 3, 13, 8:

    quasi adversus eos acquieverit sententiae,

    in regard to the same, Dig. 49, 1; 3, 1.—
    2.
    In a hostile sense, against (the most usual class. signif. of this word): “Contra et adversus ita differunt, quod contra, ad locum, ut: contra basilicam; adversus, ad animi motum, ut: adversus illum facio; interdum autem promiscue accipitur,” Charis. p. 207 P.; cf. Cort. ad Sall. J. 101, 8:

    advorsum legem accepisti a plurimis pecuniam,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 2, 48:

    advorsum te fabulare illud,

    against thy interest, to thy disadvantage, id. Stich. 4, 2, 11:

    stultus est advorsus aetatem et capitis canitudinem, id. ap. Fest. s. v. canitudinem, p. 47: advorsum animi tui libidinem,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 19:

    adversum leges, adversum rem publicam,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 84, § 195:

    respondebat, SI PARET, ADVERSUM EDICTUM FECISSE,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 28, §

    69: me adversus populum Romanum possem defendere,

    id. Phil. 1, 13 al. —In the histt., of a hostile attack, approach, etc.:

    gladiis districtis impetum adversus montem in cohortes faciunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 46:

    adversus se non esse missos exercitus,

    Liv. 3, 66:

    bellum adversum Xerxem moret,

    Aur. Vict. Caes. 24, 3:

    copiis quibus usi adversus Romanum bellum,

    Liv. 8, 2, 5:

    adversus vim atque injuriam pugnantes,

    id. 26, 25, 10 al.:

    T. Quintius adversus Gallos missus est,

    Eutr. 2, 2: Athenienses adversus tantam tempestatem belli duos duces deligunt, Just. 3, 6, 12 al.—Among physicians, of preventives against sickness, against (v. ad, I. A. 2.):

    adversus profusionem in his auxilium est,

    Cels. 5, 26; 6, 27 al.:

    frigidus jam artus et cluso corpore adversum vim veneni,

    Tac. A. 15, 64.— Trop.:

    egregium adversus tempestates receptaculum,

    Plin. Ep. 2, 17, 4; so id. ib. 2, 15, 36.—Hence: firmus, invictus, fortis adversus aliquid (like contra), protected against a thing, firm, fixed, secure:

    advorsum divitias animum invictum gerebat,

    Sall. J. 43, 5:

    invictus adversum gratiam animus,

    Tac. A. 15, 21:

    adversus convicia malosque rumores firmus ac patiens,

    Suet. Tib. 28:

    Adversus omnes fortis feras canis,

    Phaedr. 5, 10, 1; and in opp. sense: infirmus, inferior adversus aliquid, powerless against, unequal to:

    fama, infirmissimum adversus vivos fortes telum,

    Curt. 4, 14:

    infirmus adversum pecuniam,

    Aur. Vict. Caes. 9, 6:

    inferior adversus laborem,

    id. Epit. 40, 20.
    a.
    Adversus is rarely put after the word which it governs:

    egone ut te advorsum mentiar,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 7, 9:

    hunc adversus,

    Nep. Con. 2, 2; id. Tim. 4, 3:

    quos advorsum ierat,

    Sall. J. 101, 8.—
    b.
    It sometimes suffers tmesis:

    Labienum ad Oceanum versus proficisci jubet,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 33:

    animadvortit fugam ad se vorsum fieri,

    Sall. J. 58:

    animum advortere ad se vorsum exercitum pergere,

    id. ib. 69: ad Cordubam versus iter facere coepit, Auct. B. Hisp. 10 and 11; cf. in-versus:

    in Galliam vorsus castra movere,

    Sall. C. 56; Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 12; Traj. ap. Plin. Ep. 10, 78; the Eng. to-ward: to us ward, Psa. 40, 5; and the Gr. eis-de: eis halade, Hom. Od. 10, 351.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > adverto

  • 11 advorto

    ad-verto (archaic advor-), ti, sum, 3, v. a., to turn a thing to or toward a place (in this signif., without animus; mostly poet.; syn.: observare, animadvertere, videre, cognoscere).
    I.
    Lit.
    A.
    In gen., with in or dat.:

    illa sese huc advorterat in hanc nostram plateam,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 3, 51:

    in quamcunque domus lumina partem,

    Ov. M. 6, 180; cf. id. ib. 8, 482:

    malis numen,

    Verg. A. 4, 611:

    huc aures, huc, quaeso, advertite sensus,

    Sil. 16, 213; cf. id. 6, 105.—
    B.
    Esp., a naut. t. t., to turn, direct, steer a ship to a place:

    classem in portum,

    Liv. 37, 9 Drak.:

    terrae proras,

    Verg. A. 7, 35; id. G. 4, 117 al.:

    Colchos puppim,

    Ov. H. 12, 23.— Absol.:

    profugi advertere coloni,

    landed, Sil. 1, 288;

    hence also transf. to other things: aequore cursum,

    Verg. A. 7, 196:

    pedem ripae,

    id. ib. 6, 386:

    urbi agmen,

    id. ib. 12, 555: adverti with acc. poet. for verti ad:

    Scythicas advertitur oras,

    Ov. M. 5, 649 (cf. adducor litora remis, id. ib. 3, 598, and Rudd. II. p. 327).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    Animum (in the poets and Livy also animos, rarely mentem) advertere; absol., or with adv. or ad aliquid, or alicui rei, to direct the mind, thoughts, or attention to a thing, to advert to, give attention to, attend to, to heed, observe, remark:

    si voles advortere animum, Enn. ap. Var. L. L. 7, § 89 Müll. (Trag. v. 386 Vahl.): facete advortis animum tuum ad animum meum,

    Plaut. Mil. 1, 1, 39:

    nunc huc animum advortite ambo,

    id. ib. 3, 1, 169:

    advertunt animos ad religionem,

    Lucr. 3, 54:

    monitis animos advertite nostris,

    Ov. M. 15, 140:

    animum etiam levissimis rebus adverterent,

    Tac. A. 13, 49.—With ne, when the object of attention is expressed:

    ut animum advertant, ne quos offendant,

    Cic. Off. 2, 19, 68:

    adverterent animos, ne quid novi tumultūs oriretur,

    Liv. 4, 45.—
    B.
    Animum advertere, to observe a thing by directing the mind to it, to observe, to notice, to remark, to perceive (in the class. period contracted to animadvertere, q. v.).—Constr. with two accusatives, animum advertere aliquid (where aliquid may be regarded as depending on the prep. in comp., Roby, § 1118, or on animum advertere, considered as one idea, to observe), with acc. and inf., or rel. clause (the first mode of construction, most frequent with the pronouns id, hoc, illud, etc., is for the most part ante-class., and appears in Caes., Cic., and Sall. as an archaism):

    et hoc animum advorte,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 3, 43:

    hanc edictionem,

    id. ib. 1, 2, 10:

    haec animum te advertere par est,

    Lucr. 2, 125:

    animum adverti columellam e dumis eminentem,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 23, 65; id. Inv. 2, 51, 153:

    Postquam id animum advertit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 24; 4, 12:

    quidam Ligus animum advortit inter saxa repentīs cocleas,

    Sall. J. 93, 2. In Vitruv. once with hinc:

    ut etiam possumus hinc animum advertere,

    as we can hence perceive, Vitr. 10, 22, 262.—With the acc. and inf.:

    postquam tantopere id vos velle animum advorteram,

    Ter. Phorm. 5, 8, 16:

    animum advertit magnas esse copiashostium instructas,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 18: cum animum adverteret locum relictum esse, Auct. B. Alex. 31; ib. 46.—With the rel. clause: nunc quam rem vitio dent, quaeso, animum advortite, Ter. And. prol. 8: quid ille sperare possit, animum adverte, Dolab. ap. Cic. Fam. 9, 9:

    quam multarum rerum ipse ignarus esset... animum advertit,

    Liv. 24, 48. Sometimes advertere alone = animum advertere; so once in Cicero's letters: nam advertebatur Pompeii familiares assentiri Volcatio, Fam. 1, 1 (although here, as well as almost everywhere, the readings fluctuate between advertere and animadvertere; cf. Orell. ad h. l.; animadvertebatur, B. and K.). So Verg. in the imp.:

    qua ratione quod instat, Confieri possit, paucis, adverte, docebo,

    attend! Verg. A. 4, 115.—In the histt., esp. Tac. and Pliny, more frequently:

    donec advertit Tiberius,

    Tac. A. 4, 54:

    Zenobiam advertere pastores,

    id. ib. 12, 51:

    advertere quosdam cultu externo in sedibus senatorum,

    id. ib. 13, 54:

    quotiens novum aliquid adverterat,

    id. ib. 15, 30 al.:

    hirudo quam sanguisugam appellari adverto,

    Plin. 8, 10, 10, § 29:

    ut multos adverto credidisse,

    id. 2, 67, 67, § 168. Still more rarely, advertere animo:

    animis advertite vestris,

    Verg. A. 2, 712:

    hanc scientiam ad nostros pervenisse animo adverto,

    Plin. 25, 2, 3, § 5; cf. Drak. ad Liv. 4, 27, 8.—
    C.
    To draw or turn something, esp. the attention of another, to or upon one's self (in the histt.):

    gemitus ac planctus militum aures oraque advertere,

    Tac. A. 1, 41:

    octo aquilae imperatorem advertere,

    id. ib. 2, 17: recentia veteraque odia advertit, drew them on himself, id. ib. 4, 21 al.—
    D.
    To call the attention of one to a definite act, i. e. to admonish of it, to urge to it (cf. II. A.):

    non docet admonitio, sed advertit,

    i. e. directs attention, Sen. Ep. 94:

    advertit ea res Vespasiani animum, ut, etc.,

    Tac. H. 3, 48.—
    E.
    Advertere in aliquem, for the more usual animadvertere in aliquem, to attend to one, i. e. to punish one (only in Tac.):

    in P. Marcium consules more prisco advertere,

    Tac. A. 2, 32:

    ut in reliquos Sejani liberos adverteretur,

    id. ib. 5, 9 (cf. id. Germ. 7, 3: animadvertere).—Hence,
    1.
    adversus (archaic advor-), a, um, P. a., turned to or toward a thing, with the face or front toward, standing over against, opposite, before, in front of (opp. aversus).
    A.
    In gen.:

    solem adversum intueri,

    Cic. Somn. Scip. 5:

    Iris... Mille trahens varios adverso sole colores,

    Verg. A. 4, 701; id. G. 1, 218:

    antipodes adversis vestigiis stant contra nostra vestigia,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 39: dentes adversi acuti ( the sharp front teeth) morsu dividunt escas, Cic. N. D. 2, 54:

    quod is collis, tantum adversus in latitudinem patebat, quantum etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 8 Herz. So, hostes adversi, who make front against one advancing or retreating, id. ib. 2, 24:

    L. Cotta legatus in adversum os fundā vulneratur,

    in front, Caes. B. G. 5, 35; cf. Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 1; Liv. 21, 7 fin. al.; hence, vulnus adversum, a wound in front (on the contr., vulnus aversum, a wound in the back), Cic. Har. Resp. 19:

    adversis vulneribus,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 35, 4:

    judicibus cicatrices adversas ostendere,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 28:

    cicatrices populus Romanus aspiceret adverso corpore exceptas,

    id. Verr. 5, 3:

    impetus hostium adversos, Auct. B. Alex. 8: Romani advorso colle evadunt,

    ascend the hill in front, Sall. J. 52:

    adversa signa,

    Liv. 30, 8:

    legiones quas Visellius et C. Silius adversis itineribus objecerant,

    i. e. marches in which they went to meet the enemy, Tac. A. 3, 42: sed adverso fulgure ( by a flash of lightning falling directly before him) pavefactus est Nero, Suet. Ner. 48:

    armenta egit Hannibal in adversos montes,

    Quint. 2, 17, 19; cf. Lucr. 3, 1013; so Hor. S. 1, 1, 103; 2, 3, 205:

    qui timet his adversa,

    the opposite of this, id. Ep. 1, 6, 9 al. —Hence, of rivers: flumine adverso, up the stream, against the stream:

    in adversum flumen contendere,

    Lucr. 4, 423:

    adverso feruntur flumine,

    id. 6, 720; so Verg. G. 1, 201:

    adverso amne,

    Plin. 18, 6, 7, § 33;

    adverso Tiberi subvehi,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 22, 3 (opp. to secundā aquā, down stream, with the stream:

    rate in secundam aquam labente,

    Liv. 21, 47, 3); and of winds, opposed to a vessel's course, head winds, contrary winds, consequently unfavorable, adverse:

    navigationes adversis ventis praecluduntur, Auct. B. Alex. 8: adversissimi navigantibus venti,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 107.— Subst.: adversum, i, the opposite: hic ventus a septentrionibus oriens adversum tenet Athenis proficiscentibus, [p. 50] holds the opposite to those sailing from Athens, i. e. blows against them, Nep. Milt. 1 (so Nipperdey; but v. Hand, Turs. I. p. 183). — Adv.: ex adverso, also written exadverso and exadversum, opposite to, over against, ek tou enantiou:

    portus ex adverso urbi positus,

    Liv. 45, 10.—With gen.:

    Patrae ex adverso Aetoliae et fluminis Eveni,

    Plin. 4, 4, 5, § 11.—Without case:

    cum ex adverso starent classes,

    Just. 2, 14; so Suet. Caes. 39; Tib. 33.—In adversum, to the opposite side, against:

    et duo in adversum immissi per moenia currus,

    against each other, Prop. 3, 9, 23; so Gell. 2, 30; cf. Verg. A. 8, 237;

    in adversum Romani subiere,

    Liv. 1, 12; 7, 23.—
    B.
    In hostile opposition to, adverse to, unfavorable, unpropitious (opp. secundus; frequent and class.): conqueri fortunam adversam, Pac. ap. Cic. Tusc. 2, 21, 50:

    hic dies pervorsus atque advorsus mihi obtigit,

    Plaut. Men. 5, 5, 1:

    advorsus nemini,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 37:

    mentes improborum mihi infensae et adversae,

    Cic. Sull. 10:

    acclamatio,

    id. de Or. 2, 83: adversā avi aliquid facere, vet. poët. ap. Cic. Div. 1, 16:

    adversis auspiciis,

    Aur. Vict. Vir. Illustr. 64, 6:

    adversum omen,

    Suet. Vit. 8:

    adversissima auspicia,

    id. Oth. 8: adversae res, misfortune, calamity, adverse fortune:

    ut adversas res, sic secundas immoderate ferre levitatis est,

    Cic. Off. 1, 26; cf.:

    adversi casus,

    Nep. Dat. 5:

    adversae rerum undae,

    a sea of troubles, Hor. Ep. 1, 2, 22: omnia secundissima nobis, adversissima illis accidisse, Caes. ap. Cic. Att. 10, 9 (the sup. is found also in Cæs. B. C. 3, 107):

    quae magistratus ille dicet, secundis auribus, quae ab nostrum quo dicentur, adversis accipietis?

    Liv. 6, 40:

    adversus annus frugibus,

    id. 4, 12:

    valetudo adversa,

    i. e. sickness, id. 10, 32:

    adversum proelium,

    an unsuccessful engagement, id. 7, 29; cf.

    8, 31: adverso rumore esse,

    to be in bad repute, to have a bad reputation, Tac. Ann. 14, 11:

    adversa subsellia,

    on which the opposition sit, Quint. 6, 1, 39.—Sometimes met. of feeling, contrary to, hated, hateful, odious:

    quīs omnia regna advorsa sint,

    Sall. J. 83; cf. Luc. 2, 229 Bentl.— Comp.:

    neque est aliud adversius,

    Plin. 32, 4, 14, § 35.—
    * Adv.: adver-sē, self-contradictorily, Gell. 3, 16.— ad-versum, i, subst., esp. in the plur. adversa, misfortune, calamity, disaster, adversity, evil, mischief:

    advorsa ejus per te tecta sient,

    Ter. Hec. 3, 3, 28:

    nihil adversi,

    Cic. Brut. 1, 4:

    si quid adversi accidisset,

    Nep. Alc. 8; cf. Liv. 22, 40; 35, 13:

    secunda felices, adversa magnos probant,

    Plin. Pan. 31;

    esp. freq. in Tac.: prospera et adversa pop. Rom., Ann. 1, 1: adversa tempestatum et fluctuum,

    id. Agr. 25; so id. A. 3, 24; 45; 2, 69; 4, 13 al.— Subst.: adversus, i, m., an opponent, adversary (rare):

    multosque mortalīs ea causa advorsos habeo,

    Sall. C. 52, 7.—In Quint. also once ad-versa, ae, f., subst., a female opponent or adversary: natura noverca fuerit, si facultatem dicendi sociam scelerum, adversam innocentiae, invenit, 12, 1, 2.—
    C.
    In rhet., opposed to another of the same genus, e. g. sapientia and stultitia: “Haec quae ex eodem genere contraria sunt, appellantur adversa,” Cic. Top. 11.
    3.
    adversus or adversum (archaic advor-) (like rursus and rursum, prorsus and prorsum, quorsus and quorsum), adv. and prep., denoting direction to or toward an object (syn.: contra, in with acc., ad, erga).
    A.
    Adv.: opposite to, against, to, or toward a thing, in a friendly or hostile sense:

    ibo advorsum,

    Plaut. As. 2, 2, 29:

    facito, ut venias advorsum mihi,

    id. Men. 2, 3, 82:

    obsecro te, matri ne quid tuae advorsus fuas, Liv. And. ap. Non. s. v. fuam, 111, 12 (Trag. Rel. p. 3 Rib.): quis hic est, qui advorsus it mihi?

    Plaut. Men. 3, 2, 22:

    adversus resistere,

    Nep. Pelop. 1, 3:

    nemo adversus ibat,

    Liv. 37, 13, 8 al. In Plaut. and Ter. advorsum ire, or venire, to go to meet; also of a slave, to go to meet his master and bring him from a place (hence adversitor, q. v.):

    solus nunc eo advorsum hero ex plurimis servis,

    Plaut. Most. 4, 1, 23:

    ei advorsum venimus,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 32; Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 2 Ruhnk.—
    B.
    Prep. with acc., toward or against, in a friendly or a hostile sense.
    1.
    In a friendly sense.
    (α).
    Of place, turned to or toward, opposite to, before, facing, over against: qui cotidie unguentatus adversum speculum ornetur, before the mirror, Scipio ap. Gell. 7, 12:

    adversus advocatos,

    Liv. 45, 7, 5:

    medicus debet residere illustri loco adversus aegrum,

    opposite to the patient, Cels. 3, 6:

    adversus Scyllam vergens in Italiam,

    Plin. 3, 8, 14, § 87:

    Lerina, adversum Antipolim,

    id. 3, 5, 11, § 79.—
    (β).
    In the presence of any one, before:

    egone ut te advorsum mentiar, mater mea?

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 7, 9: idque gratum fuisse advorsum te habeo gratiam, I am thankful that this is acceptable before ( to) thee, Ter. And. 1, 1, 15: paululum adversus praesentem fortitudinem mollitus, somewhat softened at such firmness (of his wife), Tac. A. 15, 63.—Hence very often with verbs of speaking, answering, complaining, etc., to declare or express one's self to any one, to excuse one's self or apologize, and the like: te oportet hoc proloqui advorsum illam mihi, Enn. ap. Non. 232, 24 (Trag. v. 385 Vahl.):

    immo si audias, quae dicta dixit me advorsum tibi,

    what he told me of you, Plaut. Bacch. 4, 4, 47: de vita ac morte domini fabulavere advorsum fratrem illius, Afran. ap. Non. 232, 25:

    mulier, credo, advorsum illum res suas conqueritur,

    Titin. ib. 232, 21:

    utendum est excusatione etiam adversus eos, quos invitus offendas,

    Cic. Off. 2, 19, 68; Tac. A. 3, 71.— With that to which a reply is made, to (= ad):

    adversus ea consul... respondit,

    Liv. 4, 10, 12; 22, 40, 1; cf. Drak. ad 3, 57, 1.—
    (γ).
    In comparison, as if one thing were held toward, set against, or before another (v. ad, I. D. 4.); against, in comparison with, compared to:

    repente lectus adversus veterem imperatorem comparabitur,

    will be compared with, Liv. 24, 8, 8:

    quid autem esse duo prospera bella Samnitium adversus tot decora populi Rom.,

    id. 7, 32, 8.—
    (δ).
    Of demeanor toward one, to, toward:

    quonam modo me gererem adversus Caesarem,

    Cic. Fam. 11, 27, 11:

    te adversus me omnia audere gratum est,

    i. e. on my account, on my behalf, for my advantage, id. ib. 9, 22, 15:

    lentae adversum imperia aures,

    Tac. A. 1, 65.—Esp. often of friendly feeling, love, esteem, respect toward or for one (cf. Ruhnk. ad Ter. And. 4, 1, 15; Manut. ad Cic. Fam. 9, 22; Heusing. ad Cic. Off. 1, 11, 1;

    Hab. Syn. 49): est enim pietas justitia adversus deos,

    Cic. N. D. 1, 41, 116; id. Off. 3, 6, 28:

    adhibenda est igitur quaedam reverentia adversus homines,

    id. ib. 1, 28, 99 Beier:

    sunt quaedam officia adversus eos servanda, a quibus injuriam acceperis,

    id. ib. 1, 11, 33:

    adversus merita ingratissimus,

    Vell. 2, 69, 5:

    summa adversus alios aequitas erat,

    Liv. 3, 33, 8:

    ob egregiam fidem adversus Romanos,

    id. 29, 8, 2; so id. 45, 8, 4 al.:

    beneficentiā adversus supplices utendum,

    Tac. A. 11, 17.— More rarely
    (ε).
    of the general relation of an object or act to a person or thing (v. ad, I. D. 1.), in relation, in respect, or in regard to a thing:

    epistula, ut adversus magistrum morum, modestior,

    as addressed to a censor of manners, Cic. Fam. 3, 13, 8:

    quasi adversus eos acquieverit sententiae,

    in regard to the same, Dig. 49, 1; 3, 1.—
    2.
    In a hostile sense, against (the most usual class. signif. of this word): “Contra et adversus ita differunt, quod contra, ad locum, ut: contra basilicam; adversus, ad animi motum, ut: adversus illum facio; interdum autem promiscue accipitur,” Charis. p. 207 P.; cf. Cort. ad Sall. J. 101, 8:

    advorsum legem accepisti a plurimis pecuniam,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 2, 48:

    advorsum te fabulare illud,

    against thy interest, to thy disadvantage, id. Stich. 4, 2, 11:

    stultus est advorsus aetatem et capitis canitudinem, id. ap. Fest. s. v. canitudinem, p. 47: advorsum animi tui libidinem,

    Ter. Hec. 4, 1, 19:

    adversum leges, adversum rem publicam,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 84, § 195:

    respondebat, SI PARET, ADVERSUM EDICTUM FECISSE,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 28, §

    69: me adversus populum Romanum possem defendere,

    id. Phil. 1, 13 al. —In the histt., of a hostile attack, approach, etc.:

    gladiis districtis impetum adversus montem in cohortes faciunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 46:

    adversus se non esse missos exercitus,

    Liv. 3, 66:

    bellum adversum Xerxem moret,

    Aur. Vict. Caes. 24, 3:

    copiis quibus usi adversus Romanum bellum,

    Liv. 8, 2, 5:

    adversus vim atque injuriam pugnantes,

    id. 26, 25, 10 al.:

    T. Quintius adversus Gallos missus est,

    Eutr. 2, 2: Athenienses adversus tantam tempestatem belli duos duces deligunt, Just. 3, 6, 12 al.—Among physicians, of preventives against sickness, against (v. ad, I. A. 2.):

    adversus profusionem in his auxilium est,

    Cels. 5, 26; 6, 27 al.:

    frigidus jam artus et cluso corpore adversum vim veneni,

    Tac. A. 15, 64.— Trop.:

    egregium adversus tempestates receptaculum,

    Plin. Ep. 2, 17, 4; so id. ib. 2, 15, 36.—Hence: firmus, invictus, fortis adversus aliquid (like contra), protected against a thing, firm, fixed, secure:

    advorsum divitias animum invictum gerebat,

    Sall. J. 43, 5:

    invictus adversum gratiam animus,

    Tac. A. 15, 21:

    adversus convicia malosque rumores firmus ac patiens,

    Suet. Tib. 28:

    Adversus omnes fortis feras canis,

    Phaedr. 5, 10, 1; and in opp. sense: infirmus, inferior adversus aliquid, powerless against, unequal to:

    fama, infirmissimum adversus vivos fortes telum,

    Curt. 4, 14:

    infirmus adversum pecuniam,

    Aur. Vict. Caes. 9, 6:

    inferior adversus laborem,

    id. Epit. 40, 20.
    a.
    Adversus is rarely put after the word which it governs:

    egone ut te advorsum mentiar,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 7, 9:

    hunc adversus,

    Nep. Con. 2, 2; id. Tim. 4, 3:

    quos advorsum ierat,

    Sall. J. 101, 8.—
    b.
    It sometimes suffers tmesis:

    Labienum ad Oceanum versus proficisci jubet,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 33:

    animadvortit fugam ad se vorsum fieri,

    Sall. J. 58:

    animum advortere ad se vorsum exercitum pergere,

    id. ib. 69: ad Cordubam versus iter facere coepit, Auct. B. Hisp. 10 and 11; cf. in-versus:

    in Galliam vorsus castra movere,

    Sall. C. 56; Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 12; Traj. ap. Plin. Ep. 10, 78; the Eng. to-ward: to us ward, Psa. 40, 5; and the Gr. eis-de: eis halade, Hom. Od. 10, 351.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > advorto

  • 12 τε

    τε, enclitic Particle, with two main uses (v. infr. A, B).
    A as a Conjunction,
    I τε.. τε, both.. and, joining single words, phrases, clauses, or sentences, the first τε merely pointing forward to the second,

    ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἀγαθῶν τε κακῶν τε Hes.Op. 669

    ;

    δίψῃ τε λιμῷ τε A.Pers. 491

    , cf. S.Aj.34,35, Ar.Ach. 370, 375;

    τήν τε νῆσον τήν τε ἤπειρον Th.4.8

    , cf. Antipho 2.3.3, Pl. R. 373b;

    λυσόμενός τε θύγατρα, φέρων τ' ἀπερείσι' ἄποινα Il.1.13

    ; παῖδά τε σοὶ ἀγέμεν Φοίβῳ θ' ἱερὴν ἑκατόμβην ῥέξαι ib. 443; the elements joined by τε.. τε are usu. short in Hom., longer in later Gr., e.g.

    ἐπειδὴ πρόξενοί τέ εἰσιν Ἀθηναίων καὶ εὐεργέται.., ἔν τε τῇ στήλῃ γέγραπται IG12.103.7

    ;

    ἥ τε γὰρ γῆ.. εὔυδρός ἐστι, ποταμοί τε δι' αὐτῆς ῥέουσι Hdt.4.47

    ; χρὴ.. τούς τε πρεσβυτέρους ὁμοιωθῆναι τοῖς πρὶν ἔργοις, τούς τε νεωτέρους.. μὴ αἰσχῦναι κτλ. Th.4.92, cf. Pl.R. 474c, X.Cyr.1.4.25, Is.1.50; τά τε γὰρ ληφθέντα πάντ' ἂν σῴζοιτο οἵ τ' ἀδικήσαντες κατ' ἀξίαν λάβοιεν τὰ ἐπιτίμια Aen. Tact.16.8, cf. Gp.2.49.1, 12.3.2-3;

    τούτου γὰρ γενομένου.. τά τε ἐχφόρια Χρυσέρμῳ δυνήσομαι ἀποδοῦναι, ἐγώ τε ἔσομαι παρὰ σοῦ φιλανθρωπίας τετευχώς PEnteux.60.11

    (iii B.C.);

    κλείειν τε τὰ βλέφαρα δεομένων ἐλπιζόντων τε κοιμηθήσεσθαι Gal.16.494

    , cf. 495,501; this use is common at all times in οὔτε.. οὔτε, μήτε.. μήτε, εἴτε.. εἴτε (qq.v.); τε may be used three or more times,

    ἔν τ' ἄρα οἱ φῦ χειρί, ἔπος τ' ἔφατ' ἔκ τ' ὀνόμαζεν Od.15.530

    , cf. Il.1.177, 2.58, A.Pr. 89sq., B.17.19sq., Lys. 19.17, X.Cyr.3.3.36:— ἑνδεκάτη τε δυωδεκάτη τε prob. means the eleventh or twelfth, Od.2.374, 4.588:—sts. τε.. τε couples alternatives,

    ἀπόρως εἶχε δοῦναί τε μὴ δοῦναί τε E.IA56

    , cf. Heracl. 153, El. 391; hence we find τε.. ἢ.., Pl.Tht. 143c, Ion 535d; on (or ) .. τε in Il.2.289 and A.Eu. 524 (lyr.) v. 1.3.
    2 the first clause may be negative, the second affirmative, as

    ἐκκλησίαν τε οὐκ ἐποίει.., τήν τε πόλιν ἐφύλασσε Th.2.22

    ; but οὔτε.. τε is more freq., as

    οὔτε ποσίν εἰμι ταχύς.., γιγνώσκω τε X.Cyr.2.3.6

    (v.

    οὔτε 11.4

    ); we also find οὐ.. τε.. , as

    οὐχ ἡσύχαζον.., παρεκάλουν τε τοὺς ξυμμάχους Th.1.67

    ; and μὴ.. τε.. , as ἵνα μή τι διαφύγῃ ἡμᾶς, εἴ τέ τι βούλει κτλ. Pl.Phd. 95e.
    3 τε ( both) sts. corresponds to a following δέ ( and), or τε ( and) to a preceding μέν, e.g.
    a τε.. δὲ.. , as

    κόμισαί τέ με, δὸς δέ μοι ἵππους Il.5.359

    , cf. 7.418, S.OC 367, Tr. 285, E.Ph. 1625;

    ἐσθὰς ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν, ἅ τε.. ἐπιχώριος.., ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο Pi.P.4.80

    ;

    διήκουέ τε.., ἔπειτα δὲ καὶ ἐπῄνεσε X.Cyr.4.4.3

    ; so with ἅμα δὲ καὶ.., ὡσαύτως δὲ καὶ.., Th.1.25, Pl.Smp. 186e:—so τε.., ἀτὰρ οὖν καὶ.., Id.Hp.Ma. 295e.
    b

    μὲν.. τε.., ἄνδρα μὲν.., τρεῖς τε κασιγνήτους Il.19.291

    -3, cf. Od.22.475-6, Pi.O.6.88, 7.88, A.Th. 924, Ch. 585 (lyr.), S.Ant. 963 (lyr.), E.Heracl. 337 codd., Cyc.41 (lyr.), Ar.Nu. 563(lyr.), Pl.Phdr. 266c, Lg. 927b: v. μέν A. 11.6c.
    4 a single τε ( and) joins a word, phrase, or (esp. later) clause or sentence to what precedes,

    τελευτὴν κεφαλήν τε Pl.Ti. 69a

    ; θνητὰ ἀθάνατά τε ib.c;

    Ζεῦ ἄλλοι τε θεοί Il.6.476

    ;

    κύνεσσιν οἰωνοῖσί τε πᾶσι 1.5

    ; ῥίγησέν τ' ἂρ ἔπειτα ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν Ἀγαμέμνων v.l. for δ' ἂρ in 11.254; ἕν τε οὐδὲν κατέστη ἴαμα.., σῶμά τε αὔταρκες ὂν οὐδὲν διεφάνη.., Th.2.51; τά τε ἱερὰ.. νεκρῶν πλέα ἦν.. ib.52; νόμοι τε πάντες ξυνεταράχθησαν ibid.;

    δάκνει σ' ἀδελφὸς ὅ τε θανὼν ἴσως πατήρ E.El. 242

    , cf. 253, 262, al.;

    εἴς τε τὰς ἄλλας.. ἀθροίζεσθαι Aen.Tact.3.5

    ; τῶν τε ἀρχόντων.. ib.6, cf. 10.8, al.;

    ὅ τε γραφεὶς κύκλος.. Archim.Spir.11

    Def.7;

    πρός τε τούτοις φησὶν.. PEnteux.63.18

    (iii B.C.);

    χωρίς τε τούτων Plb.2.56.13

    , 61.1, 3.17.7;

    ταῦτά τ' ἐγίνετο.. Id.2.43.6

    , cf. 3.70.4;

    ἀπαιτούμενός τε ὑπ' ἐμοῦ τὰ ἔρια οὐκ ἀποδίδωσί PEnteux.2.6

    , cf. 8.4, al. (iii B.C.); γράψαι Ἀγαθοκλεῖ τῷ ἐπιστάτῃ διασαφῆσαί τε αὐτῷ ib.81.21 (iii B.C.);

    καθόλου τε.. Arr.Epict.1.19.13

    , cf. 2.2.17;

    ἀταράχους τήν τε δύναμιν ἀκαθαιρέτους Sor.1.21

    , cf. 24, al.;

    ὄξει βαφικῷ στυπτηρίᾳ τε PHolm. 1.4

    , cf. Gem.16.6;

    χρὴ.. λαχάνων ἅπτεσθαι, κοιλίαν τε λύειν Gp.1.12.19

    , cf. 2.2.2, al.; this τε may be used any number of times, Od.4.149- 150, 14.75, 158-9, Men.Pk.15,16,20, Hipparch.1.9.8, Act.Ap.2.43,46, 4.13, 14, al.
    II τε.. καὶ.. , or τε καὶ.. , both.. and.., where τε points forward to καί, and usu. need not be translated, e.g.

    Ἀτρείδης τε ἄναξ ἀνδρῶν καὶ δῖος Ἀχιλλεύς Il.1.7

    ; εἰ δὴ ὁμοῦ πόλεμός τε δαμᾷ καὶ λοιμὸς Ἀχαιούς ib.61; δειλός τε καὶ οὐτιδανὸς καλεοίμην ib. 293;

    ζωόν τε καὶ ἀρτεμέα 7.308

    , cf. 327, 338, al.;

    τῆς τε γῆς ἐούσης ἐπιτηδέης καὶ τῶν ποταμῶν ἐόντων σφι συμμάχων Hdt.4.47

    ;

    βούλεταί τε καὶ ἐπίσταται Th.2.35

    ;

    ὁ φύς τε καὶ τραφείς Pl.R. 396c

    ;

    βάσιν τε γὰρ πάλιν τὴν αὐτὴν ἔχουσι τὴν ΖΒ καὶ.. Euc.1.47

    ; sts. the elements joined by τε.. καὶ.. are joined in order to be compared or contrasted rather than simply joined,

    κάκιστος νῦν τε καὶ πάλαι δοκεῖ S.Ant. 181

    ;

    μεσαμβρίη τέ ἐστι καὶ τὸ κάρτα γίνεται ψυχρόν Hdt.4.181

    ;

    ἔτυχόν τε ὕσταται ἐξαναχθεῖσαι καί κως κατεῖδον Id.7.194

    ; ἐπαύσατό τε ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ τὸ κῦμα ἔστρωτο ib. 193;

    ταὐτὰ.. νῦν τε καὶ τότε Ar.Av. 24

    ;

    χωρὶς τό τ' εἰπεῖν πολλὰ καὶ τὰ καίρια S.OC 808

    ;

    ὅσον τό τ' ἄρχειν καὶ τὸ δουλεύειν δίχα A.Pr. 927

    ; sts. (like τε.. τε) even used of alternatives,

    διάνδιχα μερμήριξεν, ἵππους τε στρέψαι καὶ ἐναντίβιον μαχέσασθαι Il.8.168

    ;

    ἐν δίκᾳ τε καὶ παρὰ δίκαν Pi.O.2.16

    ;

    θεοῦ τε.. θέλοντος καὶ μὴ θέλοντος A.Th. 427

    ;

    πείσας τε.. καὶ μὴ τυχών Th.3.42

    :—on οἵ τε ἄλλοι καὶ.. , e.g.

    τοῖς τε ἄλλοις ἅπασι καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοις Isoc.12.249

    , and ἄλλως τε καὶ.. , v. ἄλλος 11.6,

    ἄλλως 1.3

    .
    2 in this sense τ' ἠδέ is only [dialect] Ep.,

    σκῆπτρόν τ' ἠδὲ θέμιστας Il.9.99

    , cf. 1.400, al.; also

    τε.., ἰδέ, χαλκόν τε ἰδὲ λόφον 6.469

    , cf. 8.162.
    3 καὶ.. τε, both.. and.., is occasionally found, as καὶ μητέρα πατέρα τ' E.Alc. 646.
    b καὶ.. τε perh. means and.. also in

    καὶ ναυτικῷ τε ἅμα Th.1.9

    ;

    καὶ πρός τε τοὺς Ῥηγίνους Id.6.44

    ;

    καὶ αὐτός τε Id.8.68

    ; v. infr. c. 10.
    4 τε.. τε or τε.. καὶ.. sts. join elements which are not syntactically parallel, esp. a part. and a finite verb, ἰοῖσίν τε τιτυσκόμενοι λάεσσί τ' ἔβαλλον (for βάλλοντες) Il.3.80;

    ἄλλα τε ἐπιφραζόμενος καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐπεπόμφεε Hdt.1.85

    ;

    ἀλλῳ τε τρόπῳ πειράζοντες καὶ μηχανὴν προσήγαγον Th.4.100

    ;

    τῆς τε ὥρας.. ταύτης οὔσης.., καὶ τὸ χωρίον.. χαλεπὸν ἦν Id.7.47

    , cf. 4.85, 8.81, 95.
    5 the copulative τε becomes rare in later Gr.; it is found about 340 times in LXX, mostly in the Pentateuch and 1-4 Ma., only 3 times in Ps.; in the NT it is found about 150 times in Act.Ap., 20 times in Ep.Hebr., and very rarely in the other books.
    B In [dialect] Ep. (more rarely in other dactylic verse, v. infr. 11) τε stands in general or frequentative statements or in statements of what is well known; such statements are freq. made as justifications of a preceding particular statement or of a preceding exhortation to a particular person or persons; the sense of τε thus approaches that of τοι (cf. τοι and τε in Od.2.276-7, and cf. Il.13.115 with 15.203); although associated with numerous particles and other words of particular types (v. infr.) its meaning remains independent of these and applies to the whole sentence in which it stands:

    αἶψά τε φυλόπιδος πέλεται κόρος ἀνθρώποισιν Il.19.221

    ;

    οὐ γάρ τ' αἶψα θεῶν τρέπεται νόος αἰὲν ἐόντων Od.3.147

    ;

    θεοὶ δέ τε πάντα ἴσασιν 4.379

    , cf. 5.79, 447, 10.306, 17.485, Il.9.497, 16.688, 17.176, 21.264;

    ξυνὸς Ἐνυάλιος καί τε κτανέοντα κατέκτα 18.309

    , cf. Od.11.537, Il.24.526;

    ἤ τ' ἔβλητ' ἤ τ' ἔβαλ' ἄλλον 11.410

    ;

    οὐ μὲν γάρ τε κακὸν βασιλευέμεν Od.1.392

    ;

    οἳ φύλλοισιν ἐοικότες ἄλλοτε μέν τε ζαφλεγέες τελέθουσιν.. ἄλλοτε δὲ.. Il.21.464

    ;

    ἄλλος γάρ τ' ἄλλοισιν ἀνὴρ ἐπιτέρπεται ἔργοις Od.14.228

    , cf. 8.169, 170, 15.400; τοῦ γάρ τε ξεῖνος μιμνήσκεται ἤματα πάντα, ἀνδρὸς ξεινοδόκου, ὅς κεν φιλότητα παράσχῃ ib.54, cf. 17.322;

    ῥεχθὲν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Il.17.32

    ;

    παθὼν δέ τε νήπιος ἔγνω Hes.Op. 218

    ;

    αἰεὶ γάρ τε νεώτεροι ἀφραδέουσιν Od. 7.294

    ; δύσζηλοι γάρ τ' εἰμὲν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φῦλ' ἀνθρώπων ib. 307;

    τοῦ δέ τε πολλοὶ ἐπαυρίσκοντ' ἄνθρωποι, καί τε πολέας ἐσάωσε Il.13.733

    -4; τοῦ μὲν γάρ τε κακοῦ τρέπεται χρὼς ἄλλυδις ἄλλῃ, ἐν δέ τέ οἱ κραδίη στέρνοισι πατάσσει.., πάταγος δέ τε γίγνετ' ὀδόντων ib. 279-83;

    ὀλίγη δέ τ' ἀνάπνευσις πολέμοιο 18.201

    ;

    νέῳ δέ τε πάντ' ἐπέοικεν.. κεῖσθαι 22.71

    ;

    κατέλεξεν ἅπαντα κήδε' ὅσ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλει, τῶν ἄστυ ἁλώῃ· ἄνδρας μὲν κτείνουσι, πόλιν δέ τε πῦρ ἀμαθύνει, τέκνα δέ τ' ἄλλοι ἄγουσι, βαθυζώνους τε γυναῖκας 9.592

    -4, cf. 22.492, 495, 499;

    νεμεσσῶμαί γε μὲν οὐδέν· καὶ γάρ τίς τ' ἀλλοῖον ὀδύρεται ἄνδρ' ὀλέσασα.. ἢ Ὀδυσῆ' Od.19.265

    ;

    σχέτλιε, καὶ μέν τίς τε χερείονι πείθεθ' ἑταίρῳ.., αὐτὰρ ἐγὼ θεός εἰμι 20.45

    , cf. 23.118, Il.2.292, 9.632; νῦν δὲ μνησώμεθα δόρπου· καὶ γάρ τ' ἠΰκομος Νιόβη ἐμνήσατο σίτου κτλ. 24.602 (where a general inference is implied);

    ὃν Βριάρεων καλέουσι θεοί, ἄνδρες δέ τε πάντες Αἰγαίων' 1.403

    , cf. 2.814, 5.306, 10.258, 14.290; sts. of repeated action by particular persons,

    ἄλλοτε μέν τε γόῳ φρένα τέρπομαι Od.4.102

    ;

    οὐ μὰ γὰρ Ἀπόλλωνα Διὶ φίλον, ᾧ τε σύ, Κάλχαν, εὐχόμενος.. θεοπροπίας ἀναφαίνεις Il.1.86

    ; ἡ δὲ.. μ' αἰεὶ.. νεικεῖ, καί τέ μέ φησι μάχῃ Τρώεσσιν ἀρήγειν ib. 521;

    μήτηρ γάρ τέ μέ φησι θεά, Θέτις ἀργυρόπεζα, διχθαδίας κῆρας φερέμεν θανάτοιο τέλοσδε 9.410

    .
    2 in exhortations addressed to an individual, a subsidiary sentence or relative clause in which he is reminded of his special or characteristic sphere of activity is marked by τε, e.g.

    Ἑρμεία, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε φίλτατόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ ἑταιρίσσαι καί τ' ἔκλυες ᾧ κ' ἐθέλῃσθα, βάσκ' ἴθι.. Il.24.334

    ;

    Ἀτρεΐδη, σοὶ γάρ τε μάλιστά γε λαὸς Ἀχαιῶν πείσονται μύθοισι.., νῦν δ' ἀπὸ πυρκαϊῆς σκέδασον.. 23.156

    ;

    δεῦρο δὴ ὄρσο, γρηῢ.., ἥ τε γυναικῶν δμῳάων σκοπός ἐσσι.., ἔρχεο Od. 22.395

    , cf. Il.17.249.
    3 similarly in general and frequentative statements consisting of two clauses (one of which may be a relative clause, freq. containing the subj. or opt.), in which the fulfilment of the condition stated in the subsidiary or subordinate clause is declared to be generally or always followed by the result stated in the principal clause, either or both clauses may contain τε:
    a the principal clause alone contains τε

    , ὅς κε θεοῖς ἐπιπείθηται, μάλα τ' ἔκλυον αὐτοῦ Il.1.218

    ;

    ὃς δ' ἂν ἀμύμων αὐτὸς ἔῃ καὶ ἀμύμονα εἰδῇ, τοῦ μέν τε κλέος εὐρὺ διὰ ξεῖνοι φορέουσι πάντας ἐπ' ἀνθρώπους, πολλοί τέ μιν ἐσθλὸν ἔειπον Od.19.333

    ;

    εἴ περ γὰρ θυμῷ γε μενοινάᾳ πολεμίζειν, ἀλλά τε λάθρῃ γυῖα βαρύνεται.., βλάβεται δέ τε γούνατ' ἰόντι Il.19.165

    -6;

    ᾧ μέν κ' ἀμμείξας δώῃ Ζεὺς τερπικέραυνος, ἄλλοτε μέν τε κακῷ ὅ γε κύρεται ἄλλοτε δ' ἐσθλῷ 24.530

    .
    b the subordinate clause alone contains τε

    , λάζετο δ' ἔγχος.. τῷ δάμνησι στίχας ἀνδρῶν ἡρώων οἷσίν τε κοτέσσεται ὀβριμοπάτρη 5.747

    ;

    ῥεῖα δ' ἀρίγνωτος γόνος ἀνέρος ᾧ τε Κρονίων ὄλβον ἐπικλώση Od.4.207

    ;

    ἀντί νυ πολλῶν λαῶν ἐστιν ἀνὴρ ὅν τε Ζεὺς κῆρι φιλήσῃ Il.9.117

    , cf. 7.298, Od.6.287, 7.74, 8.547, 18.276; with opt.,

    ἀλλὰ πολὺ πρώτιστος.. ἕλεσκον ἀνδρῶν δυσμενέων ὅ τέ μοι εἴξειε πόδεσσι 14.221

    : it is prob. that τε has been replaced by κε in the text of Hom. in Il.1.218, 9.510 (cf. 508), and some other passages in which κε seems to be used, exceptionally, in general relative clauses.
    c both clauses contain τε

    , ὃς μέν τ' αἰδέσεται κούρας Διὸς ἆσσον ἰούσας, τὸν δὲ μέγ' ὤνησαν καί τ' ἔκλυον εὐχομένοιο Il.9.508

    -9;

    εἴ περ γάρ τε χόλον γε καὶ αὐτῆμαρ καταπέψῃ, ἀλλά τε καὶ μετόπισθεν ἔχει κότον 1.82

    -3.
    4 in the subordinate clause of a collective sentence, in which the principal clause states something to be true of all those (i.e. each individual) to whom the predicate of the subordinate clause applies,

    ὑπόσχωμαι.. κτήματα.. πάντα μάλ' ὅσσα τ' Ἀλέξανδρος.. ἠγάγετο Τροίηνδ'.. δωσέμεν Il.22.115

    ;

    πάντων ὅσσα τε γαῖαν ἔπι πνείει τε καὶ ἕρπει 17.447

    , cf. Od.18.131, Il.19.105;

    βάλλειν ἄγρια πάντα τά τε τρέφει οὔρεσιν ὕλη 5.52

    , cf. 18.485.
    5 in relative clauses (and in parenthetic principal clauses) which indicate what is customary, ἐπεὶ οὐχ ἱερήϊον οὐδὲ βοείην ἀρνύσθην, ἅ τε ποσσὶν ἀέθλια γίγνεται ἀνδρῶν which are the usual prizes.., Il.22.160;

    ἔργ' ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε, τά τε κλείουσιν ἀοιδοί Od.1.338

    , cf. 3.435, 4.85, 13.410, 14.226, 17.423, Il.5.332;

    κύματος ἐξαναδύς, τά τ' ἐρεύγεται ἤπειρόνδε Od.5.438

    ;

    μολπή τ' ὀρχηστύς τε, τὰ γάρ τ' ἀναθήματα δαιτός 1.152

    : similarly in clauses with

    οἷά τε (πολλά), κῆτος ἐπισσεύῃ μέγα δαίμων ἐξ ἁλός, οἷά τε πολλὰ τρέφει.. Ἀμφιτρίτη 5.422

    ;

    οὐ γάρ σ' οὐδέ.. δαήμονι φωτὶ ἐΐσκω ἄθλων, οἷά τε πολλὰ μετ' ἀνθρώποισι πέλονται 8.160

    , cf. 11.364, 14.63, 15.324, 379.
    6 in relative clauses indicating what is true of all persons or things denoted by the same word, οὐ γάρ τις νήσων ἱππήλατος οὐδ' εὐλείμων αἵ θ' ἁλὶ κεκλίαται no one of the islands which lie in the sea (as all islands do, i.e. no island at all), Od.4.608;

    ἡμίονον.. ἥ τ' ἀλγίστη δαμάσασθαι Il.23.655

    ;

    ἐσθλὸς ἐὼν γαμβρὸς ἢ πενθερός, οἵ τε μάλιστα κήδιστοι τελέθουσι Od.8.582

    ;

    αἰετοῦ οἴματ' ἔχων.. ὅς θ' ἅμα κάρτιστός τε καὶ ὤκιστος πετεηνῶν Il.21.252

    , cf. 24.294;

    οὐδέ μιν εἰσοιχνεῦσι κυνηγέται, οἵ τε καθ' ὕλην ἄλγεα πάσχουσιν Od.9.120

    ;

    δικασπόλοι, οἵ τε θέμιστας πρὸς Διὸς εἰρύαται Il.1.238

    , cf. Od.5.67, 101, Il.1.279, 19.31, 24.415;

    οἶνός σε τρώει.., ὅς τε καὶ ἄλλους βλάπτει Od.21.293

    , cf. 14.464;

    πάρφασις, ἥ τ' ἔκλεψε νόον πύκα περ φρονεόντων Il.14.217

    ;

    οἰκωφελίη, ἥ τε τρέφει ἀγλαὰ τέκνα Od.14.223

    .
    7 when the antecedent is a definite group of gods or men, the relative clause with τε indicates an essential characteristic of the antecedent,

    Ἐρινύες, αἵ θ' ὑπὸ γαῖαν ἀνθρώπους τείνυνται Il.19.259

    ;

    Σειρῆνας.., αἵ ῥά τε πάντας ἀνθρώπους θέλγουσιν Od.12.39

    ;

    Φαίηκές μ' ἄγαγον ναυσίκλυτοι, οἵ τε καὶ ἄλλους ἀνθρώπους πέμπουσιν 16.227

    , cf. 20.187;

    νυμφάων αἵ τ' ἄλσεα καλὰ νέμονται καὶ πηγὰς ποταμῶν Il.20.8

    ;

    Λωτοφάγων, οἵ τ' ἄνθινον εἶδαρ ἔδουσι Od.9.84

    : similarly when the antecedent is an individual person (incl. god) or thing, the relative clause with τε indicates one of his or its general or essential characteristics or aspects,

    οὐ μὰ Ζῆν' ὅς τίς τε θεῶν ὕπατος καὶ ἄριστος Il.23.43

    , cf. 2.669, Od.5.4;

    Ἑρμείαο ἕκητι διακτόρου, ὅς ῥά τε πάντων ἀνθρώπων ἔργοισι χάριν καὶ κῦδος ὀπάζει 15.319

    ;

    Λάμπον καὶ Φαέθονθ', οἵ τ' Ἠῶ πῶλοι ἄγουσι 23.246

    ;

    Τειρεσίαο μάντιος ἀλαοῦ, τοῦ τε φρένες ἔμπεδοί εἰσι 10.493

    ;

    τεύχεα δύνεις ἀνδρὸς ἀριστῆος, τόν τε τρομέουσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.17.203

    , cf. 7.112; κεῖται ἀνὴρ ὅν τ' (v.l. ὃν)

    ἶσον ἐτίομεν Ἕκτορι δίῳ, Αἰνείας 5.467

    ; the relative clause sts. indicates what is customary,

    οὐδέ σε λήθω τιμῆς ἧς τέ μ' ἔοικε τετιμῆσθαι μετ' Ἀχαιοῖς 23.649

    ;

    ἔνθα δ' ἀνὴρ ἐνίαυε πελώριος, ὅς ῥά τε μῆλα οἶος ποιμαίνεσκε Od.9.187

    ;

    τῶν πάντων οὐ τόσσον ὀδύρομαι.. ὡς ἑνός, ὅς τέ μοι ὕπνον ἀπεχθαίρει καὶ ἐδωδὴν μνωομένῳ 4.105

    ;

    σῆς ἀλόχου.. ἥ τέ τοι αὔτως ἧσται ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν 13.336

    ;

    καὶ κήρυκα Μέδοντα σαώσομεν, ὅς τέ μευ αἰεὶ.. κηδέσκετο 22.357

    , cf. 346.
    8 τε is used in descriptions of particular places or things when attention is called to their peculiar or characteristic features, or their position, e.g.

    Λιβύην, ἵνα τ' ἄρνες ἄφαρ κεραοὶ τελέθουσι Od.4.85

    ;

    ἔνθα δέ τ' ὄρνιθες τανυσίπτεροι εὐνάζοντο 5.65

    , cf. 9.124, 13.99, 100, 107, 109, 244; ἓξ δέ τέ οἱ (sc. Σκύλλῃ)

    δειραὶ περιμήκεες 12.90

    , cf. 93,99, 105; ἐν δέ τε Γοργείη κεφαλή (in Athena's αἰγίς) Il.5.741; χαλεπὸν δέ τ' ὀρύσσειν ἀνδράσι γε θνητοῖσι (sc. μῶλυ) Od. 10.305;

    δοιαὶ γάρ τε πύλαι ἀμενηνῶν εἰσὶν ὀνείρων 19.562

    ; sts. τε draws attention to a well-known custom or permanent feature,

    ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ χώρου, ὅθεν τέ περ οἰνοχοεύει 21.142

    ;

    ἦ μένετε Τρῶας σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν, ἔνθα τε νῆες εἰρύατ' εὔπρυμνοι Il.4.247

    , cf. Od. 6.266;

    ἐν ποταμῷ, ὅθι τ' ἀρδμὸς ἔην πάντεσσι βοτοῖσιν Il.18.521

    , cf. Od.14.353.
    9 a part of the anatomy is defined by a clause (containing τε) which indicates a feature which universally belongs to it,

    κατ' ἰσχίον, ἔνθα τε μηρὸς ἰσχίῳ ἐνστρέφεται Il.5.305

    , cf. 8.83, 13.547, 16.481, 20.478; similarly a point of time is defined,

    ὥρῃ ἐν εἰαρινῇ, ὅτε τ' ἤματα μακρὰ πέλονται Od.18.367

    .
    10 τε is used in relative clauses which define a measurement of a particular thing or action by reference to the measurement (in general) of some thing or action well known in daily life,

    γεφύρωσεν δὲ κέλευθον μακρὴν ἠδ' εὐρεῖαν, ὅσον τ' ἐπὶ δουρὸς ἐρωὴ γίγνεται Il.15.358

    ;

    τοῦ δ' ἤτοι κλέος ἔσται ὅσον τ' ἐπικίδναται ἠώς 7.451

    ;

    ὅτε τόσσον ἀπῆν ὅσσον τε γέγωνε βοήσας Od.9.473

    , cf. 3.321, al.; more rarely the definition is by reference to the measurement of a particular thing or action, ἤσθιε.. ἕως ὅ τ' ἀοιδὸς ἐνὶ μεγάροισιν ἄειδεν (s.v.l.) 17.358;

    ἥ τις δὴ τέτληκε τόσα φρεσίν, ὅσσα τ' ἐγώ περ 19.347

    .
    11 the freq. use of τε B in similes is to be explained under one or other of the foregoing heads, e.g. when reference is made to generally known kinds of things or natural phenomena, to human experience in daily life, or to well-known phenomena of the animal world, Il.2.456, 459, 463, 468, 470, 471, 474, 481, 3.23-5,33, 11.415-7, al.; or when universal characteristics of gods, men, animals, etc., are indicated by relative clauses introduced by ὅς τε, ὅς ῥά τε, etc., 3.61, 151, 198, al.; or by ὥς τε, ἠΰτε, ὥς τίς τε, etc., e.g. 5.136, 17.133, Od.4.535,

    ὡς εἴ τε 9.314

    , 14.254, etc.
    II in post-Hom. Gr. this use of τε is more restricted; outside of [dialect] Ep. and other early dactylic verse (Hes.Op.30, 214, 233, al., Xenoph.13.3, Thgn.148, 359, etc.) it is not found except with relatives, and with these it has scarcely any discernible sense, so that ὅς τε in Lyr. and Trag. is for the most part only = ὅς, e.g. (possibly generalizing)

    Μοῖρ', ἅ τε πατρώϊον τῶνδ' ἔχει τὸν εὔφρονα πότμον Pi.O.2.35

    , cf. 14.2, A.Eu. 1024, E.Hec. 445 (lyr.), etc. (v. ὅστε); without generalizing force, Pi.N.9.9, A.Pers. 297, Ch. 615, etc.; Hdt. has

    τά πέρ τε 1.74

    ,

    ὅκως τε 2.108

    codd., ὅσον τε (without a verb, as in Od.9.325, al.) 1.126, 2.96, 3.5, al.,

    οἷά τε 1.93

    codd. (adverbially 2.175, 5.11): in [dialect] Att. Prose and Com. even these uses disappear and we find only a few phrases, as ἅτε, ὥστε, ἐφ' ᾧτε, οἷός τε; in later Gr. we find exceptionally

    ἔνθεν τε Hp.Ep.17

    ;

    ἀφ' οὗ τε UPZ62.8

    (ii B.C.);

    ἀπ' οὗ τε PCair.Zen.291.3

    (iii B.C.);

    οἵ τε GDI215.23

    (Erythrae, ii B.C.); ἥ τ' PMag.Par.1.2962;

    ὅσον τε ὀκτὼ στάδια Paus.6.26.1

    ; καὶ ἔστιν ἔπη Μαντικὰ ὁπόσα τε (= which)

    ἐπελεξάμεθα καὶ ἡμεῖς Id.9.31.5

    ;

    οἷόν τε καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς κύων φωνῆς θεωροῦμεν S.E.M.11.28

    .
    C in Hom. τε is also (but less freq.) used in conjunction with other particles in contexts (mainly particular statements) such as the following:
    1 in assurances, statements on oath, and threats,

    σχέτλιος, ἦ τ' ἐκέλευον ἀπωσάμενον δήϊον πῦρ ἂψ ἐπὶ νῆας ἴμεν Il.18.13

    ;

    ἐξ αὖ νῦν ἔφυγες θάνατον, κύον· ἦ τέ τοι ἄγχι ἦλθε κακόν 11.362

    ; ἦ τε is similarly used in 11.391, 17.171, 236, Od.24.28, 311, al.; ἦ τ' ἄν in Il.12.69, al.; γάρ τε (s. v.l.) in

    οὐ γάρ τ' οἶδα 6.367

    , cf. Od.10.190; νύ τε in 1.60, 347 (but τ' more prob. = τοι, v. σύ) ; δέ τε in

    ἀγορῇ δέ τ' ἀμείνονές εἰσι καὶ ἄλλοι Il.18.106

    ;

    σὲ δέ τ' ἐνθάδε γῦπες ἔδονται 16.836

    ; μέν τε in

    σφὼ μέν τε σαώσετε λαὸν Ἀχαιῶν 13.47

    , cf. 4.341; εἴ πέρ τε in

    οὔ τοι ἔτι δηρόν γε φίλης ἀπὸ πατρίδος αἴης ἔσσεται, οὐδ' εἴ πέρ τε σιδήρεα δέσματ' ἔχῃσιν Od.1.204

    , cf. 188, Il.12.223, 245.
    2 also in commands, warnings, and admonitions,

    σίγα, μή τίς τ' ἄλλος Ἀχαιῶν τοῦτον ἀκούσῃ μῦθον Il.14.90

    , cf. Od.19.486;

    ὣς ἄγαγ' ὡς μήτ' ἄρ τις ἴδῃ μήτ' ἄρ τε νοήσῃ Il.24.337

    ; τούσδε τ' (v.l. δ')

    ἐᾶν 16.96

    (nisi leg. τούσδ' ἔτ')

    ; δὸς δέ τέ μ' ἄνδρα ἑλεῖν 5.118

    ; μηδέ τ' ἐρώει (nisi leg. μηδ' ἔτ') 2.179, 22.185.
    3 also in passionate utterances, in clauses which indicate the cause of the speaker's passion or a circumstance which might have caused others to behave more considerately towards him,

    ὤ μοι ἐγὼ δειλή.. ἥ τ'.. τὸν μὲν.. θρέψασα.. ἐπιπροέηκα Il.18.55

    ;

    σχέτλιοί ἐστε, θεοί, ζηλήμονες ἔξοχον ἄλλων, οἵ τε θεαῖς ἀγάασθε.. ἤν τίς τε.. Od.5.119

    , 120, cf. 21.87, Il.15.468, 17.174; ἡμεῖς δ' αὖ μαχόμεσθ', οἵ πέρ τ' ἐπίκουροι ἔνειμεν and we, who ( mark you) are only allies (not γαμβροί and κασίγνητοι), are fighting, 5.477; τρεῖς γάρ τ' ἐκ Κρόνου εἰμὲν ἀδελφεοί for we, let me tell you, are three brothers, sons of Cronos (and Zeus has no prior title to power), 15.187;

    ποῖόν δε ἔπος φύγεν ἕρκος ὀδόντων δεινόν τ' ἀργαλέον τε· νεμεσσῶμαι δέ τ' ἀκούων Od.21.169

    ;

    οὐ μήν οἱ τό γε κάλλιον οὐδέ τ' ἄμεινον Il.24.52

    .
    4 in descriptions of particular events and things where there is no general reference,

    κνίση μὲν ἀνήνοθεν, ἐν δέ τε φόρμιγξ ἠπύει Od.17.270

    ; ὥς (= so)

    τέ μοι ὑβρίζοντες ὑπερφιάλως δοκέουσιν δαίνυσθαι κατὰ δῶμα 1.227

    ;

    τοὺς μέν τ' ἰητροὶ πολυφάρμακοι ἀμφιπένονται.. σὺ δ' ἀμήχανος ἔπλευ, Ἀχιλλεῦ Il.16.28

    ; πόλιν πέρι δινηθήτην καρπαλίμοισι πόδεσσι, θεοὶ δέ τε πάντες ὁρῶντο dub. l. in 22.166;

    εὗρε δ' ἐνὶ σπῆϊ γλαφυρῷ Θέτιν, ἀμφὶ δέ τ' ἄλλαι εἵαθ' ὁμηγερέες ἅλιαι θεαί 24.83

    (s.v.l.);

    ἐν δέ τε φάρμακον ἧκε Od.10.317

    ;

    νῶϊ δέ τ' ἄψορροι κίομεν Il.21.456

    ;

    πολλὰς γὰρ δὴ νύκτας.. ἄεσα καί τ' ἀνέμεινα.. Ἠῶ Od.19.342

    ;

    δέελον δ' ἐπὶ σῆμά τ' ἔθηκε Il.10.466

    ;

    ἐν δέ τε οἶνον κρητῆρσιν κερόωντο Od.20.252

    ; so with οὐδέ τ' (nisi leg. οὐδ' ἔτ')

    , τὸν καὶ ὑπέδδεισαν μάκαρες θεοὶ οὐδέ τ' ἔδησαν Il.1.406

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔληγε μέγας θεός, ὦρτο δ' ἐπ' αὐτόν 21.248

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἄειρε 23.730

    ;

    οὐδέ τ' ἔασεν 11.437

    , 21.596, cf. 15.709.
    5 ὅτε τε ( when) freq. introduces a temporal clause defining a point of time in the past by means of a well-known event which occurred then, ἦ οὐ μέμνῃ ὅτε τ' ἐκρέμω ὑψόθεν; Il.15.18;

    ὅτε τε Κρόνον.. Ζεὺς γαίης νέρθε καθεῖσε 14.203

    ;

    ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τ' ἦλθον Ἀμαζόνες 3.189

    (but ἤματι τῷ ὅτε τε is general in 13.335; so also ὅτε πέρ τε.. κέρωνται in 4.259);

    ὅτε τ' ἤλυθε νόσφιν Ἀχαιῶν ἄγγελος ἐς Θήβας 5.803

    , cf. 10.286, 22.102, Od.7.323, 18.257.
    6 in ὅ τε ( that or because) the τε has no observable meaning,

    χωόμενος ὅ τ' ἄριστον Ἀχαιῶν οὐδὲν ἔτισας Il.1.244

    , cf. 412, 4.32, 6.126, Od.5.357, al.
    8 where τ' ἄρ occurs in questions, e.g. πῇ τ' ἂρ μέμονας καταδῦναι ὅμιλον; Il.13.307, cf. 1.8, 18.188, al., ταρ (q.v.) should prob. be read, since ἄρ ([etym.] α) usu. precedes a τε which is not copulative; so perh. ταρα should be read for τ' ἄρα in Od.1.346.
    9 in

    ἣ θέμις ἐστὶν.. ἤ τ' ἀνδρῶν ἤ τε γυναικῶν Il.9.276

    , it is not clear whether τε is copulative (τε A) or generalizing (τε B) or neither (τε C); is prob. = (accented as in ἤτοι (; ἤ τ' ἀλκῆς ἤ τε φόβοιο is dub. l. in 17.42; ἤ τ' = or is found in 19.148, = than in Od.16.216.
    10 Rarer and later uses;
    a also, esp. with

    ἄλλος, Ἑρμεία, σὺ γὰρ αὖτε τά τ' ἄλλα περ ἄγγελός ἐσσι Od.5.29

    , cf. 17.273, Il.23.483;

    ἐπεὶ τά τε ἄλλα πράττουσιν καλῶς, ἀναθεῖναι αὐτοὺς καὶ στήλην IG22.1298.9

    , cf. Lycurg.100 (s.v.l.);

    ἐκομισάμην τὸ παρὰ σοῦ ἐπιστόλιον, ἐν ᾧ ὑπέγραψάς μοι τήν τε παρὰ Ζήνωνος πρὸς Ἰεδδοῦν γεγραμμένην PCair.Zen.18.1

    (iii B.C.); εἰ οὖν περὶ τούτων ἐπιστροφὴν μὴ ποιήσει, οἵ τε λοιποί μοι τὰς χεῖρας προσοίσουσιν (- σωσιν Pap.) PPetr.2p.10 (iii B.C.);

    τῶν δὲ παρὰ ταῦτα ποιησόντων τά τε κτήνη ὑπὸ στέρεσιν ἀχθήσεσθαι πρὸς τὰ ἐκφόρια PTeb.27.74

    (ii B.C.); v. supr. A. 11.3b.
    b with ὅδε, adding a slight emphasis to the preceding word,

    εἰ δὴ τήνδε τε γαῖαν ἀνείρεαι Od.13.238

    , cf. 15.484.
    c τε γάρ rarely = καὶ γάρ or γάρ, Arist.APo. 75b41, de An. 405a4, PA 661b28, Pol. 1318b33, 1333a2; ἐάν τε γάρ for even if, 2 Ep.Cor.10.8; τήν τε γὰρ ἐπιθυμίαν οὐκ ᾔδειν for I had not known even lust. Ep.Rom.7.7.
    D Position of τε:
    1 in signf. A, as an enclitic, it stands second word in the sentence, clause, or phrase, regardless of the meaning: ἐγγύθι τε Πριάμοιο καὶ Ἕκτορος near both Priam and Hector, Il.6.317;

    ἡμέτεραί τ' ἄλοχοι καὶ νήπια τέκνα 2.136

    , cf. 4.505, 7.295;

    αἰεί τε δὴ νηλὴς οὺ καὶ θράσους πλέως A.Pr.42

    codd., cf. 291 (anap.);

    ἄνευ τε δόλου καὶ ἀπάτης Hdt.1.69

    ;

    ὑπέρ τε σοῦ καὶ τῆς ἀδελφῆς PEnteux.6.6

    (iii B.C.);

    τοῖς τε πόνοις καὶ μαθήμασι Pl.R. 537a

    , cf. Ti. 70b; hence in E.Or. 897 πόλεος must be taken with what precedes (Porson ad loc.): but article + noun, preposition + noun are freq. regarded as forming a unity indivisible by τε

    , τοῖς κτανοῦσί τε A.Ch.41

    (lyr.);

    πρὸς βίαν τε Id.Pr. 210

    ; also the order is freq. determined by the meaning, τε being placed immediately after the word (or first word of a phrase or clause) which it joins to what precedes or to what follows,

    πατὴρ ἀνδρῶν τε θεῶν τε Il.1.544

    ;

    ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας A.Pr. 665

    ; the copulative or preparatory τε precedes many other particles, e.g. τε γάρ, τ' ἄρα, τέ τις.
    2 τε is enclitic in signfs. B, C also, and stands early in its sentence, clause, or phrase (v. supr.), but many particles which follow τε in signf. A precede it in signfs. B, C, e.g. in signfs. B, C we have δέ τε, μέν τε, γάρ τε, ἀλλά τε, δ' ἄρα τε, ὅς ῥά τε, οὔτ' ἄρ τε, καὶ γάρ τίς τε, ὅς τίς τε, καί τε.
    E Etymology: signf. A is found also in Skt. ca, Lat. - que; for signfs. B and c cf. Skt. ca in yá[hudot ] káś ca 'whosoever (with following verb)', Lat. - que in quisque, ubique, plerique, usque, neque, nec (= non in necopinans, etc.), Goth. ni-h 'not' (also 'and not'), Lat. namque (= nam).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τε

  • 13 τις

    τις, [full] τι, Indef. Pron.
    A any one, any thing, enclitic through all cases (for exceptions v. infr.):—but τίς; τί; Interrog. Pron. who? what?, oxyt. in the monosyll. cases, parox. in the others:—Dialectal forms: Cypr. σις ( si se) Inscr.Cypr.135.10 H.; Arc. σις (with <*> for ς) IG5(2).262.25 (Mantinea, v B.C.); Thess. κις ib.9(2).515.12 ([place name] Larissa), 1226.4, 1229.27 ([place name] Phalanna), pl. κινες ib.517.41 ([place name] Larissa), neut. κι in διεκί, ποκκί (qq.v.); neut. pl. [dialect] Dor. σά, [dialect] Boeot. τά, [dialect] Aeol. dat. τίω, τίοισι (v. infr. B). (I.-E. q[uglide]i-, cf. Lat. quis, quid, etc.; for σά, τά, v. ἄσσα, σά μάν; with τέο (v. infr. B) cf. OSlav. gen. c<*>eso.)
    A Indef. Pron. τις, τι, gen. [dialect] Ion. τεο Od.16.305, Hdt.1.58; more freq. τευ Il.2.388, al., Hdt.4.30, al., Meliss.7, etc.; Trag. and [dialect] Att. του A.Pr.21, Ar.Ach. 329, Th.1.70, etc. (sts. fem., S.Aj. 290, OT 1107 (lyr.), E.Hec. 370, etc.); του is rare after 300 B.C., never in LXX or NT, but found in IG12(5).798.17 (Tenos, iii B.C.), PCair.Zen.250.6, 647.23 (iii B.C.), Plb.3.23.3, revived by the Atticists, D.H.8.29, Plu.Fab.20, etc.; τινος Pi.P.2.90, IG12.16.17, 65.41, A.Eu. 5, Ch. 102, S.Ant. 698, al., Hdt.2.109, al. (Rh.Mus.72.483), etc.; dat. [dialect] Ion.

    τεῳ Il.16.227

    , Od.11.502, Hdt.2.48, 5.86; Trag. and [dialect] Att. τῳ (also in Hom., Il.1.299, 12.328, Od.13.308, 20.297, al., always in masc.) A.Th. 1045, IG12.39.54, D.S.18.45; as fem., A.Th. 472, S. OT80, etc.; τινι (Hom. in the form

    οὔ τινι Il.17.68

    , Od.14.96) Pi. O.9.26, al., B.17.12, Hdt.1.114 (elsewh. fem., 2.62, 3.69, 83, 4.113), A.Th. 1041, S.Aj. 443, 495, etc.; acc. τινα Il.1.62, 5.761, etc., neut. τι 2.122, etc.: dual τινε Od.4.26, Pl.Sph. 237d, Prm. 143c, 149e: pl. τινες (Hom. only in

    οὔ τινες Od.6.279

    , 17.587 and οἵτινες (v. ὅστις)); [dialect] Dor. τινεν SIG527.127 (Drerus, iii B.C.); nom. and acc. neut. τινα (

    ὅτινα Il.22.450

    ), never in Trag., Ar., Th., or Hdt., f.l. in Isoc.4.74, first in Pl.Chrm. 163d, Ep. 325a, D.47.63, Hyp.Ath.19, Alex.110, Sotad.Com.1.22, Arist.EN 1094a5, IG42(1).121.35 (Epid., iv B.C.), etc.; ἄσσα (q.v.) Od.19.218, never in Trag. or Hdt.; [dialect] Att. ἄττα first in Th.1.113, 2.100, Ar.Ra. 173, al., Pl.R. 400a, etc., never in LXX, Plb., D.S., Str., revived by the Atticists, D.H.Comp.3, etc.; gen. [dialect] Ion. τεων Hdt.2.175, 5.57, τεῶν cj. for γε ῶν in 4.76; τινων not in Hdt., first in Ar.Eq. 977 (lyr.); dat. τισι, τισιν, first in Hdt. 9.113, X.Ath.1.18; N.-W. [dialect] Dor. τινοις GDI1409.5 (Delph., iii B.C.); [dialect] Ion. τεοισι Hdt.8.113, 9.27 (for τεοις and τεον v. τεός); acc. τινας Il.15.735, Od.11.371 (also in οὕστινας, ὅτινας, v. ὅστις), etc.; neut. τινα (v. supr.):—any one, any thing, some one, some thing; and as Adj. any, some, and serving as the Indef. Art. a, an;

    θεός νύ τίς ἐστι κοτήεις Il.5.191

    ;

    καί τις θεὸς ἡγεμόνευεν Od.9.142

    ; οὐδέ τις αὐτὸν ἠείδη δμώων ib. 205; ἤ τι ὀϊσάμενος, ἢ.. ib. 339; μή τίς μοι ὑποδείσας ἀναδύη ib. 377, cf. 405- 410; εἴ τινά που μετ' ὄεσσι λάβοι ib. 418, cf. 421, al.; τις θεός construed as if τις θεῶν, 19.40, cf. 11.502, IG12.94.19, E.Hel. 1039.
    II special usages:
    1 some one (of many), i.e. many a one,

    ὧδε δέ τις εἴπεσκεν Il.7.201

    , etc.: sts. with meiosis, implying all or men, 13.638, Od.3.224; so in Prose, Hdt.5.49 fin., Th.2.37, etc.
    2 any one concerned, every one,

    εὖ μέν τις δόρυ θηξάσθω Il.2.382

    ; ἀλλά τις αὐτὸς ἴτω let every man come himself, 17.254;

    ἵνα τις στυγέῃσι καὶ ἄλλος 8.515

    , cf. 16.209, 17.227, al.; so in Trag. and [dialect] Att., even with the imper., τοῦτό τις.. ἴστω S Aj.417 (lyr.), cf. E.Ba. 346, Ar.Av. 1187;

    ἀγορεύω τινὶ ἐμὲ μὴ βασανίζειν Id.Ra. 628

    ; τοὺς ξυμμάχους αὐτόν τινα κολάζειν that every man should himself chastise his own allies, Th.1.40, cf. 6.77;

    ὅ τί τις ἐδύνατο Id.7.75

    ; ἄμεινόν τινος better than any others, D.21.66, cf. 19.35:—this is more fully expressed by adding other pronominal words,

    τις ἕκαστος Od.9.65

    , Th.6.31, etc.;

    πᾶς τις A.Ag. 1205

    , Hdt.6.80, Th.8.94, etc.;

    ἅπας τις Hdt.3.113

    , etc.;

    οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον Id.4.118

    . In these senses, τις is freq. combined with pl. words, οἱ κακοὶ.. οὐκ ἴσασι, πρίν τις ἐκβάλῃ, for πρὶν ἐκβάλωσι, S.Aj. 965; οἷς ἂν ἐπίω, ἧσσόν τις πρόσεισι, for ἧσσον προσίασι, Th.4.85;

    ἐτόλμα τις.., ὁρῶντες Id.2.53

    , cf. 7.75; esp. after εἴ or ἤν τις, X. Mem.1.2.62, al.
    3 in reference to a definite person, whom one wishes to avoid naming, οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, ἐὰν μή τις χρήματα διδῷ (i.e. Cyrus) Id.An.1.4.12, cf. Ar.Ra. 552, Theoc.5.122; so also euphem. for something bad,

    ἤν τι ποιῶμεν Th.2.74

    ;

    ἂν οὗτός τι πάθῃ D.4.11

    : hence for the [ per.] 1st or [ per.] 2nd pers. Pron.,

    ἅ τιν' οὐ πείσεσθαι ὀΐω Il.1.289

    , cf. S.Ant. 751; ποῖ τις τρέψεται; for ποῖ τρέψομαι; Ar.Th. 603, cf. S.Aj. 245 (lyr.), 1138, Th.4.59, X.An.3.4.40, 5.7.31, etc.
    4 indefinitely, where we say they, French on, sts. with an ironical force,

    φοβεῖταί τις A.Ch.59

    (lyr.);

    μισεῖ τις ἐκεῖνον D.4.8

    ; as voc., τὸν Πλοῦτον ἔξω τις κάλει call P. out, somebody, Ar.Pl. 1196.
    5 τις, τι may be opposed, expressly or by implication, to οὐδείς, οὐδέν, and mean somebody, something, by meiosis for some great one, some great thing, ηὔχεις τις εἶναι you boasted that you were somebody, E.El. 939;

    εἰσὶν ὅμως τινὲς οἱ εὐδοκιμοῦντες Arist.Pol. 1293b13

    ;

    τὸ δοκεῖν τιν' εἶναι Men.156

    ;

    τὸ δοκεῖν τινὲς εἶναι D.21.213

    ;

    ὡς σὲ μὲν ἐν τῇ πόλει δεῖ τινὰ φαίνεσθαι, τὴν πόλιν δ' ἐν τοῖς Ἕλλησι μηδενὸς ἀξίαν εἶναι Id.10.71

    ; κἠγών τις φαίνομαι ἦμεν after all I too am somebody, Theoc.11.79, cf. Act.Ap.5.36; also in neut.,

    οἴονταί τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς ἄξιοι Pl.Ap. 41e

    , cf.Phd. 63c, Phdr. 243a, Euthd. 303c, etc.:— so τι λέγειν to be near the mark, opp. οὐδὲν λέγειν, Id.Prt. 339c, R. 329e, Phdr. 260a, etc.;

    ἵνα καὶ εἰδῶμεν εἴ τι ὅδε λέγει Id.Cra. 407e

    ;

    οἴεσθέ τι ποιεῖν, οὐδὲν ποιοῦντες Id.Smp. 173c

    .
    b τις is sts. opp. to another word,

    ἀελλοπόδων μέν τιν' εὐφραίνοισιν ἵππων τιμαί.., τέρπεται δὲ καί τις.. Pi.Fr. 221

    ;

    τισὶ τῶν πολιτῶν ἀποροῦσι συνεξέδωκε θυγατέρας.., τοὺς δ' ἐλύσατο ἐκ τῶν πολεμίων Lys.19.59

    ;

    μέρος μέν τι σιδήρου, μέρος δέ τι ὀστράκινον LXX Da.2.33

    (more freq. with the Article, v. infr. 10 c); ἔστιν οὖν οὐ πᾶν τὸ ταχύ, ἀλλά τι (sic codd. BT)

    αὐτοῦ ἀγαστόν Pl.Cra. 412c

    ;

    ἀναγκαῖον ἤτοι πᾶσι τοῖς πολίταις ἀποδίδοσθαι πάσας ταύτας τὰς κρίσεις ἢ τισὶ πάσας.. ἢ τινὰς μὲν αὐτῶν πᾶσι τινὰς δὲ τισίν Arist.Pol. 1298a9

    , cf. 1277a23; τὸ μεῖζον τοῦθ' ὅπερ ἐστὶν ἑτέρου λέγεται· τινὸς γὰρ λέγεται μεῖζον greater than something, Id.Cat. 6a38;

    τὸ πρώτως ὂν καὶ οὐ τὶ ὂν ἀλλ' ὂν ἁπλῶς Id.Metaph. 1028a30

    ; πότερον τῷ τυχόντι ἢ τισίν; Id.Pol. 1269a26.
    6 with pr. names τις commonly signifies one named so-and-so,

    ἦν δέ τις ἐν Τρώεσσι Δάρης Il.5.9

    , cf. X.An.3.1.4, etc.; with a sense of contempt, Θερσίτης τις ἦν there was one Thersites, S.Ph. 442.
    b one of the same sort, converting the pr. name into an appellative, ἤ τις Ἀπόλλων ἢ Πάν an Apollo or a Pan, A.Ag.55 (anap.); [πόλιες] ταὶ μέλονται πρός τινος ἢ Διὸς ἢ γλαυκᾶς Ἀθάνας Lyr.in PVat.11v xi7;

    Σκύλλαν τινά A.Ag. 1233

    , cf.Ar.V. 181, Av. 512, Ra. 912: so also

    ὥς τις ἥλιος A.Ag. 288

    ; ἰσθμόν τιν' Ar. Th. 647.
    7 with Adjs. τις combines to express the idea of a Subst. used as predicate, ὥς τις θαρσαλέος καὶ ἀναιδής ἐσσι προΐκτης a bold and impudent beggar, Od.17.449, cf. 18.382, 20.140, Il.3.220; ἐγώ τις, ὡς ἔοικε, δυσμαθής a dull ard, Pl.R. 358a, cf. Prt. 340e; φόβου πλέα τις εἶ a cow ard, A.Pr. 696, cf. Th. 979(lyr.), Ag. 1140 (lyr.); ὡς ταχεῖά τις.. χάρις διαρρεῖ in what swift fashion ( = ταχέως πως), S.Aj. 1266, cf. OT 618, Hdt.4.198; δεινόν τι ποιεύμενος thinking it a terrible thing, Id.3.155, 5.33.
    8 with numerals and Adjs. expressing number, size, or the like , εἷς δέ τις ἀρχὸς ἀνὴρ.. ἔστω some one man, Il.1.144;

    ἕνα τιν' ἂν καθεῖσεν Ar.Ra. 911

    ;

    δώσει δέ τι ἕν γε φέρεσθαι Od.15.83

    ;

    τινὰ μίαν νύκτα Th.6.61

    ;

    προσκαλεσάμενός τινας δύο τῶν ἑκατονταρχῶν Act.Ap.23.23

    ; sts. the τις softens the definiteness of the numeral, ἑπτά τινες some seven, seven or so, Th.7.34;

    ἐς διακοσίους τινάς Id.3.111

    , cf. 7.87, 8.21; so without an actual numeral, ἡμέρας τινάς some days, i.e. several, Id.3.52; στρατῷ τινι of a certain amount, considerable, Id.8.3; ἐνιαυτόν τινα a year or so, Id.3.68; so οὐ πολλοί τινες, τινὲς οὐ πολλοί, A.Pers. 510, Th. 6.94, etc.; ὀλίγοι τινές or

    τινὲς ὀλίγοι Id.2.17

    , 3.7; οὔ τινα πολλὸν χρόνον no very long time, Hdt.5.48;

    τις στρατιὰ οὐ πολλή Th.6.61

    ; so also ὅσσος τις χρυσός what a store of gold, Od.10.45, cf. Hdt. 1.193, 2.18, etc.;

    κόσοι τινές Id.7.234

    ;

    πηλίκαι τινὲς τιμωρίαι Isoc. 20.3

    ;

    πολλὸς γάρ τις ἔκειτο Il.7.156

    ;

    ἐκ πολλοῦ τευ χρόνου Hdt. 2.58

    .
    9 with Pronominal words, ἀλλά τί μοι τόδε θυμὸς.. μερμηρίζει something, namely this, Od.20.38, cf. 380; οἷός τις what sort of a man, Il.5.638 (dub. l.), cf. Od.9.348, 20.377, Pl.Prt. 313a, etc.;

    ποῖός τις S.Ant.42

    , OC 1163, Hdt.3.34, X.An.7.6.24, etc.;

    ὁποῖός τις Id.Cyr.2.2.2

    , al.;

    εὐτυχίη τις τοιήδε Hdt.3.139

    , cf. X.Mem.1.1.1, etc.;

    τοιοῦτός τις Id.An.5.8.7

    .
    10 with the Article,
    a when a noun with the Art. is in appos. with τις, as ὅταν δ' ὁ κύριος παρῇ τις when the person in authority, whoever he be, is here, S.OC 289; τοὺς αὐτοέντας.. τιμωρεῖν τινας (v.l. τινα) Id.OT 107.
    b in Philosophic writers, τις is added to the Art. to show that the Art. is used to denote a particular individual who is not specified in the general formula, although he would be in the particular case, ὁ τὶς ἄνθρωπος the individual man (whoever he may be), this or that man, opp. ἄνθρωπος (man in general), ὁ τὶς ἵππος, ἡ τὶς γραμματική, Arist.Cat. 1b4, 8; τὸ τὶ μέγεθος, opp. ὅλως τὸ μέγεθος, Id.Pol. 1283a4, cf. S.E.P.2.223; but in

    ἑνὸς γὰρ τό γε τὶ φήσεις σημεῖον εἶναι Pl.Sph. 237d

    , the Art. is used as in Il. cc. s.v. ,

    , τό B.1.5

    : later ὅ τις (or ὁ τὶς ) much like ὁ δεῖνα, δεῦρο ὅ τις θεός, ὄφθητί μοι in a general formula of invocation, PMag.Par.1.236; αἴρω σε, ἥ τις βοτάνη ib.287; εἰς τήν τινα κρείαν (leg. χρείαν) ib.289.
    c freq. in opposed clauses,

    ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δὲ.. E.Med. 1141

    , Hec. 624, Pl.Phd. 99b, etc.;

    ὁ μέν τις.., ἄλλος δὲ.. E.IT 1407

    ;

    ὁ μὲν.., ὁ δέ τις.. X.Cyr.1.4.15

    : pl.,

    οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.. Hdt.1.127

    , cf. Th.2.91;

    οἱ μέν τινες.., οἱ δὲ.., οἱ δέ τινες X.Cyr.3.2.10

    , etc.; οἱ μὲν.., οἱ δέ τινες.. ib.6.1.26, etc.: also combined with other alternative words,

    ὁ μέν τις.., ὁ δέ τις.., ἕτερος δέ τις.. Id.Smp.2.6

    ; ὁ μὲν.., ἕτερος δέ τις.., ὁ δὲ.. , etc., Ar. Pl. 162 sq.: also in neut.,

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δέ τι.. Pl.Ep. 358a

    ;

    τὸ μέν τι.., τὸ δὲ.. Hdt.3.40

    ; in adverb. sense, τὸ μὲν.., τὸ δέ τι.. partly.., partly.., Plb.1.73.4; and τι remains unaltered even when the Art. is pl.,

    τὰ μέν τι μαχόμενοι, τὰ δὲ καὶ ἀναπαυόμενοι X.An.4.1.14

    , cf. HG7.1.46; also τὸ δέ τι.. but in some measure.., without τὸ μέν preceding, Th.1.107, cf. 118, 7.48.
    d later τις is used as in b supr. but without the Art., γράψον.. ὅτι τι καί τι εἴληφας that you have received such and such things, POxy.937.22 (iii A.D.); κληρονόμους καταλείπω τὴν θυγατέρα μού τινα καὶ τὸν σύντροφον αὐτῆς τινα καί τινα ib.1034.2 (ii A.D.); τίς τινι χαίρειν A to B greeting (in a draft letter), ib. 509 (ii A.D.).
    II the neut. τι is used,
    a collectively, ἦν τι καὶ ἐν ταῖς Συρακούσαις there was a party.., Th.7.48; so perh. τῶν ἄλλων οὔ πέρ τι πεφυγμένον ἐστ' Ἀφροδίτην, οὔτε θεῶν, οὔτ' ἀνθρώπων no class, h.Ven.34 (but masc. τις in h.Merc. 143).
    b euphem. for something bad, v. supr. 3.
    c joined with Verbs, somewhat, in any degree, at all,

    ἦ ῥά τί μοι κεχολώσεαι Il.5.421

    ;

    παρεθάρρυνέ τι αὐτούς X.HG6.4.7

    , etc.: with Adjs. or Adverbs, οὕτω δή τι ἰσχυραί, οὕτω δή τι πολύγονον, etc., Hdt.3.12, 108, cf. 4.52; so also

    ὀλίγον τι ἧσσον Od.15.365

    ;

    οὐδέ τι μᾶλλον Hdt.6.123

    , etc.;

    ἧσσόν τι Th.3.75

    , etc.; οὐ πάνυ τι, πολύ τι, σχεδόν τι, v. πάνυ 1.3,

    πολύς 111.1a

    , 2a, σχεδόν IV; also in conjunction with

    οὐδέν, μηδέν, οὐδέν τι πάντως Hdt.6.3

    ; οὐδέν, μηδέν τι μᾶλλον, E.Alc. 522, S.Aj. 280;

    μηδέν τι λίαν E.Andr. 1234

    :—also καί τι καὶ.. ὑποψίᾳ in part also from suspicion, Th.1.107;

    καί πού τι καί Pi.O.1.28

    .
    12 τίς τε freq. in Hom.,

    ὡς ὅτε τίς τε Il.3.33

    , 4.141, v. τε B.
    13 ἤ τις ἢ οὐδείς few or none, next to none, Hdt.3.140, X.Cyr.7.5.45, D.C.47.5, 48.4; ἤ τι ἢ οὐδέν little or nothing, Pl.Ap. 17b;

    ἢ οὐδεὶς ἤ τις D.C.41.62

    (s. v.l.).
    14 τις is pleonast. in such phrases as οὐδέν τι or μηδέν τι, v. supr. 11c.
    b repeated in successive clauses,

    ὅσα λέγει τις ἢ πράσσειτις ἢψέγειν ἔχει S.Ant. 689

    ;

    εἴ τις δύο ἢ καὶ πλέους τις ἡμέρας λογίζεται Id.Tr. 944

    (where however κἄτι πλείους is prob. cj.), cf. E.Or. 1218 (whereas τις is sts. omitted in the first clause,

    οὔτε φωνὴν οὔτε του μορφὴν βροτῶν A.Pr.21

    , cf. S.Tr.3): but in E.Andr. 734, ἔστι γάρ τις οὐ πρόσω.. πόλις τις, the repetition is pleonastic, as also in A.Supp.57 sq. (lyr., s. v.l.).
    15 τις is sts. omitted, οὐδέ κεν ἔνθα τεόν γε μένος καὶ χεῖρας ὄνοιτο (sc. τις) Il.13.287; ὡς δ' ἐν ὀνείρῳ οὐ δύναται (sc. τις)

    φεύγοντα διώκειν 22.199

    , cf. S.OC 1226 (lyr.), Leg.Gort.2.2, X.Smp.5.2, Pl.Grg. 456d: τις must often be supplied from what goes before, ib. 478c, Prt. 319d.
    b sts. also τις is omitted before a gen. case which must depend upon it, as

    ἢ [τις] τᾶς ἀσώτου Σισυφιδᾶν γενεᾶς S.Aj. 189

    (lyr.); ἢν γαμῇ ποτ' αὐτὸς ἢ [τις]

    τῶν ξυγγενῶν Ar.Nu. 1128

    ;

    ἐν τῶν πόλεων IG12.56.14

    .--Cf. ὅστις, οὔτις, μήτις, ἄλλο τι.
    1 accentuation: τις is normally enclitic, but in certain uses is orthotone, i.e. theoretically oxytone (τίς, τινά, τινές, τινῶν, etc., cf. Choerob. in Theod.1.373 H.) and barytone when followed by another word ( τὶς or τις, τινὰ, τινὲς, τινῶν, etc.). According to Sch. D.T.p.240 H. its orthotone accent is τίς (not τὶς) , τίνα, τίνες, etc. The orthotone form is used in codd.:
    a at the beginning of a sentence, τίς ἔνδον.. ; is any one within? A.Ch. 654 ( τὶς cj. Hermann); τί φημι; = λέγω τι; am I saying anything? S.Tr. 865, OT 1471; <τίς ἦλθε;> ἦλθέ τις has anybody come? Somebody has come, Sch.D.T. l.c.; τὶς κάθηται, τὶς περιπατεῖ, so and so is sitting (walking), S.E.M.8.97; τὶς αἰπόλος καλούμενος Κομάτας Sch.Theoc.7.78;

    τίς ποτε οἰκοδεσπότης.. ἐκοπία Aesop.

    in Gloss. iii p.41; or after a pause,

    πῶς γὰρ ἄν, ἔφην ἐγώ, ὦ βέλτιστε, τὶς ἀποκρίναιτο Pl.R. 337e

    ; τι οὖν ([etym.] τὶς ἂν εἴποι) ταῦτα λέγεις; D.1.14 (v.l.);

    ἔντοσθεν δὲ γυνά, τι θεῶν δαίδαλμα Theoc.1.32

    ;

    οὐ γυμνὸν τὸ φίλαμα, τι δ' ὦ ξένε καὶ πλέον ἑξεῖς Mosch.1.5

    (v.l. for τὺ).
    b when τις is opp. to another τις or to some other word,

    τισὶ μὲν συμφέρει, τισὶ δ' οὐ συμφέρει Arist.Pol. 1284b40

    , cf. Th.2.92, Pl.Cri. 49a, D. 9.2;

    τινὲς μὲν οὖν.., ἡμεῖς δὲ.. Sor.1.1

    ;

    τὸ τὶ μὲν ψεῦδος ἔχον, τὶ δὲ ἀληθές S.E.M.8.127

    ;

    ἀλλὰ τινὰ μὲν.., τινὰ δὲ.. Gem.14.6

    ;

    ποτὲ μὲν πρὸς πάντα, ποτὲ δὲ πρὸς τινά Sor.1.48

    : without such opposition, τοῦτ' εἰς ἀνίαν τοὔπος ἔρχεται τινί for a certain person, S.Aj. 1138. Codd. are not consistent; in signf.11.5a, 10c, 13 they make it enclitic; in signf. 11.5b sts. enclitic, sts. orthotone (v. supr.); sts. enclitic and orthotone in the same sentence,

    πάντα δὲ τὰ γιγνόμενα ὑπό τέ τινος γίγνεται καὶ ἔκ τινος καὶ τί Arist.Metaph. 1032a14

    , cf. Pl.Chrm. 165c.
    2 position:
    a τις is rarely first word in the sentence, and rarely follows a pause (v. supr. 111.1a, b); it may stand second word,

    ἔσκε τις ἐνθάδε μάντις ἀνήρ Od.9.508

    , cf. Il.8.515, 23.331; but in general its position is not far before or after the word to which it belongs in sense,

    ἀλλ' ἄγε δή τινα μάντιν ἐρείομεν 1.62

    ;

    φυλακὴ δέ τις ἔμπεδος ἔστω 8.521

    .
    b in [dialect] Ion. Prose it sts. stands between its genitive and the Article of that genitive,

    τῶν τις Περσέων Hdt.1.85

    ;

    τῶν τις ἱρέων Id.2.38

    ;

    τῶν τινες Φοινίκων Id.8.90

    ;

    ἐς τῶν τι ἄλλο στομάτων τοῦ Νείλου Id.2.179

    ; so also in late Prose, Ath.3.108d, Eust.1402.18, 1659.27, 1676.1.
    c it stands between the Art. and Subst. in signf.11.10b.
    d τίς τι is the correct order, not τί τις, IG12.110.46, Th.7.10, X.An.4.1.14 (codd. dett.), D.22.22, etc.
    e whereas in [dialect] Att. the order ἐάν τις is compulsory, in [dialect] Dor. the usual order is αἴ τίς κα, Leg.Gort.9.43, al., Tab.Heracl.1.105, al. (but

    αἴ κά τις Epich.35

    , 159;

    αἰ δέ κα μή τις Leg.Gort.5.13

    ): later [dialect] Dor.

    εἴ τί κα GDI2101.3

    , al.; καἴ τι ἂν ( = καὶ εἴ τι ἂν) IG5(1).1390.50 (Andania, i B.C., v. infr. B.11.1b):—this [dialect] Dor. order influenced the Koine, as in the rare

    εἴ τις ἂν Plu.TG15

    .

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > τις

  • 14 HINN

    * * *
    I)
    (hin, hitt), dem. pron.
    1) the other; á hinn fótinn, on the other leg; pl. the others, the rest (Kimbi bar sár sín engan mun betr en hinir);
    2) emphatically, that; hitt ek hugða, that was what I thought; hitt vil ek vita, that I want to know.
    (hin, hit), def. art., before an adjective standing alone or followed by a substantive, the, = inn, enn( eptir hinni eystri kvísl).
    * * *
    1.
    HIN, HIT, the article, an enclitic, which therefore can never serve as an accentuated syllable in a verse, either as rhyme or in alliteration. In good old MSS. (e. g. Cod. Reg. of Sæm.) it is hardly ever spelt with the aspirate, but is written inn, in, it or ið, or enn, en, et or eð, and thus distinguished from the demonstr. pron. hinn; but in the Editions the prob. spurious aspirate has been generally prefixed: an indecl. inu or hinu occurs often in later MSS. of the 14th century, e. g. the Fb.; but as it has not been heard of since and is unknown in the modern language, it simply seems to be a Norwegianism, thus, inu sömu orð, Th. 2; hinnu fyrri biskupa (gen. pl.), H. E. ii. 79; enu instu luti ( res intimas), Hom. 57 (Norse MS.); hinu ágæztu menn (nom. pl.), id.; innu óargu dýra, 657 A. ii. 12: [cp. Goth. jains = ἐκεινος; A. S. geond; Engl. yon; Germ. jener.]
    A. The:
    I. preceding the noun:
    1. before an adjective standing alone or followed by a substantive; inn mæri, inn ríki, inn dimmi dreki, inn mikli mögr, Vsp.; in aldna, id.; inn góða mjöð, the good mead, Gm. 13; inn mæra mjöð, Skm. 16; inn helga mjöð, Sdm. 18; in forna fold, Hým. 24; in fríða frilla, 30; inn fróði jötum, Vþm. 20; inn gamli þulr, 9; inn hára þul, Fm. 34; inn fráni ormr, 19; opt inn betri bilar þá er inn verri vegr, Hm. 127; in alsnotra ambátt, in arma, Þkv.; enn fróði afi, Skm. 2; in ílla mæra, 32; enn fráni ormr, 27; eð manunga man, Hm. 163; enn aldna jötun, 104; en horska mær, 95; it betra, Stor. 22; ena þriðju, the third, Vsp. 20; inn móður-lausi mögr, Fm. 2; it gjalla gull, ok it glóðrauða fé, 9; ið fyrsta orð, Sdm. 14; enu skírleita goði, Gm. 39; in glýstömu græti, Hðm. 1; in svásu goð, Vþm. 17; enum frægja syni, Hm. 141; at ins tryggva vinar, 66; ennar góðu konu, 100; ins svinna mans, 162; ens dýra mjaðar, 141; ens hindra dags, 109; ens unga mans, Skm. 11; ens deykkva hrafns, Skv. 2. 20; æ til ins eina dags, Fm. 10; ena níundu hverja nótt, Skm. 21: with the ordinals, inn fyrsti, þriði …, Gm. 6 sqq., Sdm. 21 sqq.
    2. so also before an adverb; it sama, likewise, Hm. 75, Fm. 4, Vþm. 22, 23, Gm. 15, Hdl. 26.
    3. as an indecl. particle ‘in’ or ‘en’ before a comparative; in heldr, the more, Hm. 60, Sdm. 36, Hkv. 1. 12, Skv. 1. 21, Gh. 3, Nj. 219; in lengr, the longer, Am. 58, 61; this has been already mentioned s. v. en (p. 127, B. at bottom, and p. 128), but it is almost exclusively poetical.
    II. placed between a pronoun and an adjective in the definite form:
    1. after a demonstr.; sá inn fráni ormr, Fm. 26; sá inn harði hallr, Gs. 10; sá inn aldni jötun, Skm. 25; sá inn ámáttki jötunn, 10; þat ið mikla men, Þkv. 13; þat ið litla, ‘that the little,’ i. e. the little thing, Ls. 44: þann inn alsvinna jötun, Vþm. 1; þann inn aldna jötun, Fm. 29; þann inn hrímkalda jötun, 38; þess ins alsvinna jötuns, Vþm. 5; þat it unga man, Alm. 6; þann inn aldna jötun, Gm. 50; þau in harðmóðgu ský, 41; sá inn máttki munr, 93; mönnum þeim enum aldrœnum, Hbl. 44; börn þau in blíðu, Og. 9; hrís þat ið mæra, Akv. 5: in prose, fjölmenni þat it mikla, Eg. 46; þetta it mikla skip, Fms. x. 347, passim: with ordinals, segðu þat ið eina, say that the first, Vþm. 20; þat ið þriðja, fjórða …, 20 sqq.
    2. after a possessive; síns ins heila hugar, síns ins svára sefa, Hm. 105; þíns ins hvassa hjörs, Fm. 29; minn inn hvassi hjörr, 6; míns ins hvassa hjörs, 28; bækr þínar inar bláhvítu, Hðm.
    3. after a pers. pron.: þú hinn armi, thou wretch! Ld. 326; gakk þú hingat hinn mikli maðr! Eg. 488.
    III. placed between two nouns in apposition:
    1. between a proper name and a title or epithet in the definite form; Sigurðr inn Suðræni, Sigurd the Southerner, Skv. 3. 4; Atli inn Ríki, Akv. 29; Högna ins frækna, Hjalla ins blauða, 23; Guðröðr inn Göfugláti, Ýt.; Hamðir inn hugumstóri, Hðm. 25; Kjötva’nn (= Kjötva enn) Auðga, Hornklofi; Svan enum Rauða, Álfr enn Gamli, Hdl.; as also in prose, Ívarr inn Víðfaðmi, Haraldr enn Hárfagri, Ólafr inn Digri, Knútr inn Fundni, Auðr in Djúpauðga, Þorbjörg in Digra, Hildr in Mjófa, Steinólfr inn Lági, Þorkell inn Hávi, Kjarlakr inn Gamli, Björn inn Austræni, Ólafr inn Hvíti, Hálfdan inn Svarti, Sighvatr inn Rauði, Kyjólfr inn Grá, Gestr inn Spaki; Ari inn Fróði (Aren Froðe contr. = Are enn Froðe, Ó. T. 23, line 1), Ketill inn Heimski, Knútr inn Ríki, Eadvarðr inn Góði, Hálfdan inn Mildi, Ingjaldr inn Illráði, Helgi inn Magri, Úlfr inn Skjálgi, Landn., Fb. iii; cp. Gr. Νέστωρ ὁ γέρων, Σωκράτης ὁ φιλόσοφος, Germ. Nathan der Weise, Engl. Alfred the Great, etc.: of ships, Ormr inn Langi, Ormr inn Skammi.
    2. between an appellative and an adjective; sveinn inn hvíti, Ls. 20; hendi inni hægri, 61; þengill inn meins-vani, Gm. 16; seggr inn ungi, Skm. 2; skati inn ungi, Hdl. 9; brúðr in kappsvinna, Am. 75; hest inn hraðfæra, Gh. 18; varr inn vígfrækni, gumi inn gunnhelgi, Hðm. 30; auð inn fagra, Skv. 1. 13; orm inn frána, 1, 11; fjánda inn fólkská, Fm. 37; konungr inn Húnski, Skv. 3. 8, 18, 63, 64; orð ið fyrra, Og. 9; mál ið efsta, 16; seggr inn suðræni, Akv. 3; seggr inn æri, 6; mar’inum mélgreypa, 3, 13; borg inni há, 14; sól inni suðrhöllu, 30; veðrs ens mikla, Hkv. 1. 12; handar ennar hægri, Ls. 38, 61; vífs ins vegliga, Am. 54; konung inn kostsama, Hkm.; gramr inn glaðværi, id.; hlut inn mjóvara, Ýt. 13; konungr inn kynstóri, fylkir inn framlyndi, hilmi’nom hálsdigra, konu’na Dönsku, hverr’ enni Heinversku, Hornklofi, Sæm. (Möb.) 228–231; við arm inn vestra, Sighvat; so also in prose passim.
    B. When there was no adjective the article became a suffix to the noun (see Gramm. pp. xix, xx), a usage common even in early prose, but extremely rare in poetry; the reason is, not that the poems were composed before the suffixed article had come into use, but that the metres themselves in which all the old poems were composed are older than that usage, and are not well adapted to it, so that the absence of the article became traditional. The old poem Harbarðsljóð makes an exception, no doubt not from being later than all other poems, but from being composed in a peculiar metre, half verse and half prose; thus in that single poem alone there are nearly twenty instances, or about twice or thrice as many as in all the other poems together:—váginn, Hbl. 2, 13, 15; sundit, 1, 3, 8, 13; verðinum, 4; eikjunni, 7; skipit, id.; stöðna, landit, id.; leiðina, 55; höfuðit, 15; bátinum, 53; veggsins, stokksins, steinsins, 56; matrinn, 3: other solitary instances are, goðin öll, Vsp. 27 (prob. somewhat corrupt); eiki-köstinn, Gh. 20; vömmin vár, Ls. 52.
    II. in prose, old and modern, the suffixed article occurs at every step; only one or two instances are worth noticing as peculiar to the Icelandic:
    1. as vocative in addressing; konan, O woman! mjöðnannan, id., Sighvat (in a verse of A. D. 1018, and so in mod. usage); elskan! hjartað! heillin! ástin, my love! dear! heart! þursinn! Fas. i. 385; hundarnir! = ω κύνες, Od. xxii. 35: also with another word, barnið gott, good child! Þrúðnaþussinn, thou monster giant! Miðgarðs-ormrinn! Fas. i. 373.
    2. esp. if with a possessive adjective following, as in Gr. οὑμός, τοὐμόν, τἀμά, etc.; elskan mín, ástin mín, hjartað mitt, góðrinn minn! hér er nú ástin mín, here is my darling! Sturl. ii. 78, of a father presenting a darling child to a friend; and so in mod. usage: as abuse, hundrinn þinn, thou dog! Ísl. ii. 176; þjófrinn þinn! Fms. vii. 127; dyðrillinn þinn! ii. 279; hundinum þínum! vi. 323: this use is not confined to the vocative, e. g. konan mín biðr að heilsa, my wife (kona mín is never used); maðrinn minn, my husband; biddu foreldrana þína ( ask thy parents) að lofa þér að fara; augun hans, his eyes, Pass. 24. 4; hugrinn vor og hjartað sé, our mind and heart (cp. Gr. τω ἐμω θυμω), 43. 5; svo hjartað bæði og málið mitt | mikli samhuga nafnið þitt, 10. 7; gef þú að móður-málið mitt, 35. 9; bókin mín, my favourite book, my own book; as also, fáðu mér hattinn minn, vetlingana mína, skóna mína, give me my hat, gloves, shoes; tungan í þér, augun í þér, thy tongue, thy eyes; höfuðið á mér, fætrnir á mér, my head, my feet; hendrnar á þér (‘á mér, á þér’ are here equivalent to a possessive, see p. 37, C. IV), thy hands, cp. Homer, τα σα γούνατα; hestana þína, Gr. ϊππους τους σούς: similar is the instance, vömmin vár, the sins of ours, Ls. 52; this may be a remnant of a time when the article was used separately, even with an indefinite adjective.
    3. a double article, one suffixed to the noun and the other prefixed to the word in apposition; hirðin sú in Danska, Fms. vi. 323; þau in stóru skipin, viii. 384 and passim: again, when a noun is put in the genitive after another noun the former has no article; as the Engl. phrase ‘the fish of the sea and the fowl of the air’ is in Icel. ‘fiskar sjávarins og fuglar loptsins:’ but this belongs to the syntax; see also Grimm’s D. G. iv. 432.
    C. SPECIAL CHANGES, in mod. usage:
    I. the demonstr. pron. sá, sú, það has in speech generally taken the place of inn, in, it; thus, sá gamli maðr, sú gamla kona, það gamla skáld; sometimes the article is dropped altogether, e. g. á fimta degi, on the fifth day (= á enum fimta degi); á sömn stundu, in the same hour; even in old writers this is found, með sömu ætlan, Bs. i. 289; á níundu tíð dags, Stj. 41, (but rarely); yet the old form is often retained in writing.
    II. in case A. II. the article may be dropped; þann gamla maim, þá gömlu konu, það gamla skáld, þú armi, etc.; sá ráða-góði, sú goðum-líki, sá ágæti Odysseifr, sú vitra Penelopa, sá Jarðkringjandi Pósídon, Od. passim (in Dr. Egilsson’s translation).
    III. in case A. III. 1. the article is also dropped, Knútr Ríki, Haraldr Hárfagri; even old writers (esp. in later vellums) omitted it now and then, Hálfdan Svarta, Fms. i. 1; Haraldr Grænski, 90; Haraldr Hárfagri, 192; Óttarr ungi, Hdl.: even in the Sæm. Cod. Reg., Völsungr ungi, Skv. 3. 1, 3.
    IV. in case A. III. 2. the pronouns sá, sú, það, and hinn, hin, hit may be used indiscriminately, although the former is more usual.
    V. lastly, in case B. the suffixed article has gained ground, and is in modern prose used more freq. than in ancient.
    ☞ CONCLUSION.—The old poetical language, with the sole exception of a single poem, had no article in the modern and proper sense; in every instance the ‘inn, in, it’ bears the character of a demonstrative pronoun, preceding an adjective and enhancing and emphasising its sense, like the pers. pron. hann, q. v.; but it is never attached to a single substantive; when the adjective was placed in apposition after a noun, the pronoun came to stand as an enclitic just after the noun, and was sounded as if suffixed thereto; at last it was tacked as an actual suffix to single nouns standing without apposition, and thus the true suffixed article gradually arose, first in speech, then in writing; whereas at the same time the old pronominal enclitic (A. I-III) gradually went out of use, and was either dropped or replaced by the stronger demonstrative pronoun ‘sá, sú.’
    2.
    HIN, HITT, demonstr. pron., prob. identical in etymology with the preceding word, from which it is however distinguished,
    1. by the neut. hitt, Dan. hint;
    2. by the initial aspirate, which is never dropped;
    3. by being a fully accentuated pronoun, so that the h can stand as an alliterative letter, e. g. handar ennar hægri | mun ek hinnar geta, Ls.; veitkat ek hitt hvart Heita | hungr …, Hallfred; Hitt kvað þá Hamðir, etc., Hom. 23, 25, Korm. 40; Raun er hins at Heinir | hræ …; Skáld biðr hins at haldi | hjálm …, Sighvat, Hkv. Hjörv. 26: [Ulf. jains = ἐκεινος; A. S. geond; Engl. yon; Germ. jener.]
    A. This pronoun is used,
    I. in a demonstr. sense, emphatically and without being opp. to a preceding demonstr.; raun er hins at …, it is proved that …; skáld biðr hins, at …, Sighvat; veitkat ek hitt hvat (hvárt) …, Hallfred; hitt ek hugða, emphatically, that was what I thought, I thought forsooth, Hm. 98; hitt kvað pá Hróðrglóð, Hðm. 13; hitt kvað þá Hamðir, 25; hitt vil ek vita, that I want to know, Vþm. 3, 6; þó ek hins get, ef …, yet I guess, that if …, Skm. 24; vita skal hitt, ef …, Korm. 40 (in a verse), Ísl. ii. 225 (in a verse); hitt var fyrr = in former times, formerly, Ýt., Fs. 94 (in a verse); hinn er sæll, er …, he is happy, that …, Hm. 8; maðr hinn er …, ‘man he that’ = the man who, 26; hinn er Surts ór Sökkdölum, Edda 51 (in a verse); veitat hinn er tin tannar, hinn er um eyki annask, Kormak (in a verse); handar innar hægri mun ek hinnar geta, er …, the right hand, that hand namely, which …, Ls. 38; this usage scarcely occurs except in old poetry.
    II. demonstr. referring to another pronoun, denoting the former, farther, the other, = Dan. hiin, hint, Germ. jener, cp. Gr. ἐκεινος, Lat. ille; freq. in prose, old and mod.; fóru þeir með þau skip er þeim þóttu bezt en brenndu hin, Fms. v. 8; Kimbi bar sár sitt engan mun betr en hinir, er hann hafði áðr á fært, 92; en hitt er meira, at hann lætr sér annarra manna fé jafnheimilt, Eg. 47; kemr örvar-oddrinn í strenglag hinnar örvarinnar, Fb. iii. 405; er þú hefir mik fyrir lagt á hinu áðr, 407; hinir frændr þínir, ii. 425; á hinn fótinn, on that, the other leg, Nj. 97; þat er válítið, … hitt er undr …, Ls. 33; hinir hlaða seglunum ok bíða, Fms. x. 347; ef hinn ( the other part) er eigi þar við staddr, Grág. i. 52; hvárt hinn ( the other one) hefir jafnmikit fé hins ( of the other one) er austr er, 220; rétt er at kveðja frá hennar heimili ef hann veit hvártki hinna (gen. pl.), 339; ok vill annarr hluta en annarr eigi … ok verðr sem hinn mæli ekki um er eigi vill hluta, 393; ef maðr sendir annan mann til eindaga, ok erat hinn skyldr við at taka, id.; þess á milli er hón fór at sofa á kveldit, ok hins er hón var klædd, Ld. 14; ærit fögr er mær sjá, … en hitt veit ek eigi hvaðan þjófs-augu eru komin í ættir várar, forsooth she is a beautiful girl, but yet I know not, Nj. 2:—demonstr. in the sense of this (but rare), stjörnur þær er nær eru leiðar-stjöruu ganga aldri undir með oss, en í Blálandi eðr Arabia ganga hinar stjörnur, these very stars, Rb. 468: phrases, hitt ok annat, this and the other, Rd. 235; mod. hitt og þetta.
    B. COMPOUND FORMS, hinn-ug, hinn-og, or hins-ig, mod. hins-egin, also hizig, q. v. [from vegr], adv. the other way; þótt Gísl þykki hinsig (hinn veg, v. l.) eigi síðr til vísa, Fms. vii. 46; hinnig værir þú undir brún at líta sem …, Nj. 55: locally, there, in the other place, illic, ok láta bera vætti þat hinneg var nefnt, Grág. i. 90; heimta af erfingja ef hinnig er eigi til, K. Þ. K. 28; brenndi þar ok görði hervirki eigi minna enn hinneg, Fms. vi. 340; ef hinnig mundi kostr, K. Þ. K. 24; eigi er hægra undir þeim at búa fyrir kulda sakir, enn hinnog er fyrir ofrhita sakir, Sks. 196; því at hón er kaldari hér en hizug, 70: temp. the other day, formerly (rare), er ek hinnig mælta, Og. 11.
    2. denoting motion, hither, thither; hinnig deyja ór Helju halir, Vþm. 43; renna hinnig, Gh. 18; ríða hinig, Fm. 26: koma hinig, Gs. 18.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > HINN

  • 15 χράω

    χράω (A), used in [dialect] Ep. only in [tense] aor. 2,
    A fall upon, attack, assail, c. dat. pers.,

    στυγερὸς δέ οἱ ἔχραε δαίμων Od.5.396

    ;

    τίς τοι κακὸς ἔχραε δαίμων; 10.64

    ; so

    ἠϊθέοις οὐκ ἔστι τόσος πόνος, ὁππόσος ἡμῖν.. ἔχραε AP5.296

    (Agath.): cf. ἐπιχράω (B).
    II c. acc. rei, inflict upon a person,

    κακὸν δέ οἱ ἔχραε κοῖτον Nic.Th. 315

    .
    III c. inf., conceive a desire to.., τίπτε σὸς υἱὸς ἐμὸν ῥόον ἔχραε κήδειν ἐξ ἄλλων; why did he want (or needed he) to vex my stream of all others? Il.21.369; μνηστῆρες.., οἳ τόδε δῶμα ἐχράετ' ἐσθιέμεν καὶ πινέμεν ye suitors.., who have become so eager to.., Od.21.69. (For signfs. 1, 11, cf. ζαχρηής; for 111 perh. cf. χρή, κέχρημαι ( χράω (B) C), χρῇ, χρῇς.)
    ------------------------------------
    χράω (B). A. FORMS: [var] contr.
    A

    χρῇ S.El.35

    , [dialect] Ion.

    χρᾷ Hdt.1.62

    (also Luc.DMort.3.2); inf.

    χρᾶν Hdt.8.135

    (also Luc.Alex.19); [dialect] Ion. part.

    χρέων h.Ap. 253

    , fem.

    χρέωσα Hdt.7.111

    ; [dialect] Ep.

    χρείων Od.8.79

    , h.Ap. 396: [tense] impf.

    ἔχραον Pi.O.7.92

    (v.l. ἔχρεον), A.R.2.454; [ per.] 3sg.

    ἔχρη Tyrt.3.3

    , Hermesian.7.89, ([etym.] ἐξ-) S.OC87: [tense] fut.

    χρήσω h.Ap. 132

    , Hdt.1.19, A.Ag. 1083: [tense] aor.

    ἔχρησα Hdt.4.156

    , etc.:—[voice] Pass., [tense] aor.

    ἐχρήσθην Id.1.49

    , etc.: [tense] pf. κέχρησμαι (v.l. κέχρημαι) Id.4.164, 7.141: [tense] plpf. ἐκέχρηστο (v.l. ἐκέχρητο) Id.2.147, 151, 3.64, etc.:—[voice] Med.,

    χρῶμαι Th.1.126

    , etc., [dialect] Ion.

    χρέομαι Hdt.

    , inf.

    χρέεσθαι 1.157

    ( χρᾶσθαι ib. 172); part.

    χρεώμενος 4.151

    : [tense] impf. [ per.] 3pl. ἐχρέωντο (v.l. ἐχρέοντο) 4.157, 5.82: [tense] fut.

    χρήσομαι Od.10.492

    , etc.
    I in [voice] Act. of the gods and their oracles, proclaim, abs.,

    χρείων μυθήσατο Φοῖβος 8.79

    :

    χρείων ἐκ δάφνης γυάλων ὕπο Παρνησοῖο h.Ap. 396

    : c. acc. rei, χρήσω ἀνθρώποισι Διὸς βουλήν ib. 132, cf. Thgn.807, Pi.l.c., Plot.2.9.9;

    ἡ Πυθίη οἱ χρᾷ τάδε Hdt.1.55

    , cf. 4.155; χρῆσεν οἰκιστῆρα Βάττον proclaimed him the colonizer, Pi.P.4.6; also in Trag.,

    ὁ χρήσας A. Eu. 798

    ;

    χρήσειν ἔοικεν ἀμφὶ τῶν αὑτῆς κακῶν Id.Ag. 1083

    ;

    χρῇ μοι τοιαῦθ' ὁ Φοῖβος S.El.35

    ;

    σοὶ δ' οὐκ ἔχρησεν οὐδέν E.Hec. 1268

    ;

    χ. φόνον Id.El. 1267

    : also c. acc. cogn.,

    χ. χρησμόν Id.Ph. 409

    ;

    ὑμνῳδίαν Id. Ion 681

    (lyr.): c. inf., warn or direct by oracle,

    ἔχρησας ὥστε τὸν ξένον μητροκτονεῖν A.Eu. 202

    ; without ὥστε, ib. 203; χρήσαντ' ἐμοὶ.. ἐκτὸς αἰτίας κακῆς εἶναι that I should be.., Id.Ch. 1030; c. inf. [tense] aor., Ar. V. 159: rare in [dialect] Att. Prose,

    τάδε ὁ Ἀπόλλων ἔχρησεν IG12.80.10

    ;

    τὸν Ἀπόλλω ταύτην τὴν γῆν χρῆσαι οἰκεῖν Th.2.102

    ;

    τοῦ θεοῦ χρήσαντος Id.5.32

    , cf. Lycurg.99;

    ἔχρησεν ὁ θεός SIG1044.5

    (Halic., iv/iii B. C.);

    ὁ θεὸς ἔχρησε IG42(1).122.78

    (Epid., iv B. C.).
    II [voice] Pass., to be declared, proclaimed by an oracle,

    τίς οὖν ἐχρήσθη; E. Ion 792

    ; mostly of the oracle delivered,

    τὰ ἐκ Δελφῶν οὕτω τῷ Κροίσῳ ἐχρήσθη Hdt.1.49

    ;

    τὰ χρηστήρια ταῦτά σφι ἐχρήσθη Id.9.94

    ;

    ἠπίως χρησθῆναι Id.7.143

    ; τὸ χρησθέν, τὰ χρησθέντα, the response, Id.1.63, 7.178;

    ἐν Πυθῶνι χρησθὲν παλαίφατον Pi.O.2.39

    ;

    πεύθου τὰ χρησθέντ' S.OT 604

    ; χρησθὲν αὐτῷ ἐν Νεμέᾳ τοῦτο παθεῖν since it was foretold him by an oracle that.. Th.3.96; ἃ τοῦδ' ἐχρήσθη σώματος which were declared about it, S.OC 355;

    τὸν κεχρησμένον θάνατον Hdt.4.164

    (- χρημ- codd.);

    τοῦ κακοῦ τοῦ κεχρησμένου Id.7.141

    (v.l. -χρημ-): impers., c. inf., καί σφι ἐχρήσθη ἀνέμοισι εὔχεσθαι ib. 178: c. acc. et inf.,

    ἐκέχρηστό σφι.. τοῦτον βασιλεύσειν Id.2.147

    ; c. inf. [tense] aor., Id.7.220.
    III [voice] Med., of the person to whom the response is given, consult a god or oracle, c. dat.,

    ψυχῇ χρησόμενος Θηβαίου Τειρεσίαο Od.10.492

    , 565; χ. θεῷ, χρηστηρίοισι, μαντηΐῳ, Hdt.1.47, 53, 157;

    τῷ θεῷ Aeschin.3.124

    ;

    χ. μάντεσι Μούσαις Ar.Av. 724

    (anap.), cf. Pl. Lg. 686a;

    ὅσοι μαντικὴν νομίζοντες οἰωνοῖς χρῶνται X.Mem.1.1.3

    ; χ. χρηστηρίῳ εἰ .. inquire at the oracle whether.., Hdt.3.57: abs.,

    ὑπέρβη λάϊνον οὐδὸν χρησόμενος Od.8.81

    , cf. h.Ap. 252, 292;

    ἀπέστειλε ἄλλους χρησομένους Hdt.1.46

    ; οἱ χρώμενοι the consulters, E.Ph. 957;

    χρωμένῳ ἐν Δελφοῖς Th.1.126

    ; also

    χ. περὶ τοῦ πολέμου Hdt.7.220

    , cf. 1.85, 4.150, 155, etc.;

    κεχρημένος

    having inquired of an oracle,

    Arist.Rh. 1398b33

    : c. inf., σωφρονεῖν κεχρημένον being divinely warned to be temperate, A.Pers. 829, cf. Marcellin.Vit. Thuc.6: later simply, receive a divine revelation, Plot.5.3.14.—Hom. has the word in this sense only in Od.: the [voice] Act. only in [tense] pres. part. χρείων ([tense] fut.

    χρήσω h.Ap. 132

    ): the [voice] Med. only in part. [tense] fut. χρησόμενος.
    B furnish with a thing, in which sense the [tense] pres. was [full] κίχρημι, D.53.12, Plu.Pomp.29; Cret. [ per.] 3sg.

    κίγχρητι Inscr.Cret.1 xxiii 3

    (Phaestus, ii B. C.); Delph. [ per.] 3sg. [tense] pres. subj.

    κιχρῇ Schwyzer 324.17

    (iv B. C.): [tense] aor. χρέη ib.13; [tense] pres. part. κιχρέντε ib.adn. (rarely [full] χρηννύναι, [full] χρηννύω, Thphr.Char.5.10, 10.13: [voice] Med.,

    χρηννυόμεθα PCair.Zen. 304.4

    (iii B. C.)): [tense] fut.

    χρήσω Hdt.3.58

    : [tense] aor. ἔχρησα ibid., 6.89, Ar. Th. 219, X.Mem.3.11.18, Lys.19.24, IG12.108.16, etc. ([ per.] 3sg. written

    ἔκχρησεν IG12(3).1350.4

    ([place name] Thera)); imper.

    χρῆσον Ar.Ra. 1159

    , Pl. Com.205: [tense] pf.

    κέχρηκα Men.461

    , 598, Plb.29.21.6 ( = D.S.31.10): [tense] plpf.

    ἐκεχρήκει App.BC2.29

    :—[voice] Pass., [tense] pf. κέχρημαι ([etym.] δια-) D.27.11:—[voice] Med., [tense] pres.

    κίχρᾰμαι Plu.2.534b

    ; inf.

    κίχρασθαι Thphr.Char.30.20

    : [tense] impf.

    ἐκιχράμην AP9.584.10

    : [tense] aor. ἐχρησάμην, imper.

    χρῆσαι E.El. 191

    (lyr.), etc.:— furnish the use of a thing, i.e. lend, usu. in a friendly way, δανείζω being the word applied to usurers (but χ. = δανείζω in Antipho Soph.54), ll. cc.;

    οὐ δεδωκώς, ἀλλὰ χρήσας Arist.EN 1162b33

    , cf. LXX Ex.11.3;

    ἡ πειρατικὴ δύναμις χρήσασα ταῖς βασιλικαῖς ὑπηρεσίαις ἑαυτήν Plu.Pomp.24

    ;

    χ. τὴν ἑαυτοῦ σχολήν τισι Id.Phil. 13

    ; χ. τὰν χέρα, in the formula of manumission, IG9(1).189, 194 ([place name] Tithora):—[voice] Med., borrow, τι E.El. 191 (lyr.), Thphr.Char.30.20: abs.,

    χρησαμένη γὰρ ἔνησα καὶ οὐκ ἔχω ἀνταποδοῦναι Batr.186

    ; πόδας χρήσας, ὄμματα χρησάμενος having lent feet and borrowed eyes, of a blind man carrying a lame one, AP9.13 (Pl.Jun.), cf. Pl.Demod. 384b, 384c.
    ------------------------------------
    χράομαι. (See also χράω)
    C [voice] Med. [full] χράομαι, [dialect] Att. [full] χρῶμαι, χρῇ prob. in Pl.Hp.Mi. 369a,

    χρῆται Ar.V. 1028

    (anap.), etc. (also Trag., A.Ag. 953), χρώμεθα, χρῆσθε, χρῶνται, And.4.6, Pl.La. 194c, Th.1.70, etc.; [dialect] Dor. [full] χρέομαι Sophr.126; [dialect] Ion.

    χρᾶται Hdt.1.132

    , al. (so in later Prose, Iamb. in Nic.p.28 P.); χρέεται v.l. in Hdt.4.50;

    χρέονται Hp.

    Aër.1;

    χρέωνται Hdt.1.34

    , 4.108, al.;

    χρείωνται Heraclit.104

    ; opt.

    χρῴμην, χρῷο Pl. Cri. 45b

    ,

    χρῷτο Gorg.Fr.20

    , etc.; [dialect] Ion.

    χρέοιτο Hp.Acut.56

    ; imper.

    χρῶ Democr.270

    , Ar.Th. 212, Isoc.1.34, [dialect] Ion.

    χρέο Hp.Steril.230

    , Hdt. 1.155 (v.l. χρέω, as in Hp.Acut. (Sp.) 62); [ per.] 3sg. [dialect] Dor.

    χρηείσθω SIG 1009.7

    (Chalcedon, iii/ii B. C.); [ per.] 2pl.

    χρῆσθε And.1.11

    ; [ per.] 3pl.

    χρήσθων Ar.Nu. 439

    (s. v.l.; v. infr.111.4b), Th.5.18;

    χρώσθων IG12.122.5

    ; [dialect] Dor.

    χρόνσθω Mnemos.57.208

    (Argos, vi B. C.); inf. [dialect] Att. and [dialect] Ion.

    χρῆσθαι IG12.57.19

    , Ar.Av. 1040, Lys.25.20, SIG57.5 (Milet., v B. C.), IG12(5).593 A12 (Ceos, v B. C.); [dialect] Ion. and Hellenistic

    χρᾶσθαι Hdt. 2.15

    , 3.20, al., IG12(5).606.9 (Ceos, iv/iii B. C.), SIG344.50 (Teos, iv B. C.), 1106.80 (Cos, iv/iii B. C.), PCair.Zen.299.10 (iii B. C.), OGI214.19 (Didyma, iii B. C.), IG22.1325.24 (both forms in Phld.Rh.1.66S. and Ph.Bel.,

    χρῆσθαι 57.35

    , al.,

    χρᾶσθαι 53.49

    , al.), [dialect] Ion. χρέεσθαι as v.l. for χρῆσθαι Hdt.1.21, 187, al. ( χρῆσθαι ib. 153 codd.), so in Arc., IG5 (2).514.14 (Lycosura, ii B. C.), Elean

    χρηῆσται Inscr.Olymp.1.3

    (vii/vi B. C.), [dialect] Boeot.

    χρειεῖσθη IG7.3169

    (Orchom., iii B. C.); [dialect] Locr. and [dialect] Lacon.

    χρῆσται IG9(1).334.19

    , 23 (Oeanthea, v B. C.), 5(1).1317.8 (Thalamae, iv/iii B. C.); part. [dialect] Att.

    χρώμενος A.Eu. 655

    , IG12.81.6, etc.; [dialect] Ep. and [dialect] Ion.

    χρεώμενος Il.23.834

    (as a dactyl), Hdt.2.108, Hp.Acut.18, [dialect] Dor.

    χρείμενος SIG395.4

    , 438.11 (both Delph., iii B. C.), Berl.Sitzb.1927.156 ([place name] Cyrene),

    χρήμενος Riv.Fil.58.472

    (Gortyn, iii B. C.),

    χρεύμενος SIG1166.3

    ([place name] Dodona): [tense] impf. [dialect] Att.

    ἐχρώμην Antipho 5.63

    ,

    ἐχρῶ Ar.Ra. 111

    , And.1.49,

    ἐχρῆτο Th.1.130

    , etc.; pl.,

    ἐχρώμεθα Lys.Fr.29

    ,

    ἐχρῶντο Antipho 6.28

    , etc.; [dialect] Ion.

    ἐχρᾶτο Hdt.2.173

    (v.l. -ῆτο), 3.3, 129, al. (also found in Anaxipp.1.9 codd.Ath.),

    ἐχρέωντο Hdt.2.108

    , al.: but

    ἐχρῆτο 3.41

    codd., Herod.6.55, ([etym.] προς-) Hp.Epid.3.17.ά: [tense] fut.

    χρήσομαι S.Ph. 1133

    (lyr.), etc.; also

    κεχρήσομαι Theoc.16.73

    : [tense] aor.

    ἐχρησάμην S.OT 117

    , Th.5.7, al.: [tense] pf. κέχρημαι (v. infr. 1): [tense] aor. ἐχρήσθην in pass. sense (v. infr. vii):—in [tense] pf. κέχρημαι (with [tense] pres. sense) c. gen., desire, yearn after, the usual sense in [dialect] Ep., οὔτ' εὐνῆς πρόφασιν κεχρημένος (sc. αὐτῆς)

    οὔτε τευ ἄλλου Il.19.262

    ;

    νόστου κεχρημένον ἠδὲ γυναικός Od.1.13

    ;

    κομιδῆς κεχρημένοι ἄνδρες 14.124

    , cf. 17.421, 20.378, 22.50;

    μαντοσυνεων κεχρημένοι Emp.112.10

    .
    2 to be in want of, lack,

    τοῦ κεχρημένοι; S.Ph. 1264

    , cf. E.IA 382 (troch.); [

    βορᾶς] κεχρημένοι Id.Cyc.98

    ;

    οὐ πόνων κεχρήμεθα Id.Med. 334

    ;

    τίνος κέχρησθε, γυναῖκες; Theoc.26.18

    : [tense] fut.,

    ὃς ἐμεῦ κεχρήσετ' ἀοιδοῦ Id.16.73

    ; χρήσομεθα εἰς τὰ ἔργα καὶ ὁδοῦ.. καὶ ὕδατος we shall need.., SIG1182.12 (Ephes., iii B. C.): freq. abs. in part. κεχρημένος, lacking, needy, Od.14.155, 17.347, Hes.Op. 317, 500, E.Supp. 327, Pl.Lg. 717c: but κεχρηόσι δαίτης is f.l. for κεχαρηόσι in Nic.Fr.70.18.
    3 [tense] pf. and [tense] plpf. κέχρημαι, κεχρήμην, in [tense] pres. and [tense] impf. sense, c. dat., enjoy, have, φρεσὶ γὰρ κέχρητ' ἀγαθῇσι ([etym.] ν) Od.3.266, 14.421, 16.398; αὕτη (sc. ἡ χώρη)

    ὕδασι κάλλιστα κέχρηται Hp.

    Aër.12; ἡ καταδεεστέροις τούτοις (sc. τοῖς εἴδεσι)

    κεχρημένη τραγῳδία Arist.Po. 1450a32

    , cf. a13, b33; ἄλλαις, μικραῖς διαφοραῖς, Id.Metaph. 1042b31, Phgn. 809a8; ὑγροτέραις σαρξί ib. b11; θριξὶ ξανθαῖς ib.25;

    καθαρωτάτῳ.. αἵματι Id.Resp. 477a21

    ; τῶν.. πλαγίαις ταῖς ῥάβδοις κεχρημένων (sc. ἰχθύων) Id.Fr. 295;

    εὐγενείᾳ κεχρημένος IG42(1).83.10

    (Epid., i A. D.);

    σφαιρικῷ ὄγκῳ PLit.Lond.167.25

    (ii/iii A. D.), cf. κεχρημένως ([place name] Addenda); so in [tense] pres.,

    χρῶνται δειλαῖς φρεσὶ, δαίμονι δ' ἐσθλῷ Thgn.161

    ; μέρη

    τραγῳδίας, οἷς ὡς εἴδεσι δεῖ χρῆσθαι, πρότερον εἴπομεν Arist.Po. 1452b14

    , cf. 1458b14.
    II use, [tense] pres. once in Hom., abs.,

    ἑξει μιν καὶ πέντε περιπλομένους ἐνιαυτοὺς χρεώμενος Il.23.834

    : later mostly c. dat. (for acc. v. infr. VI),

    ἀκμαζούσῃ τῇ ῥώμῃ τῶν χειρῶν χρώμενος Antipho 4.3.3

    ;

    ἐσθῆτι τοιῇδε χρέωνται Hdt.1.195

    , cf. 202, Ar.Ra. 1061 (anap.);

    διφασίοισι γράμμασι χ. Hdt.2.36

    ; τοῖσιοὐνόμασι τῶν θεῶν ib.52; πλατυτέροισι ἐχρέωντο τοῖσι πόμασι, ἐκ φρεάτων χρεώμενοι ib. 108; τοῖσι ἐποποιοῖσι χρεώμενον λέγειν ib. 120; ὅστις ἐμπύρῳ χρῆται τέχνῃ consults burnt offerings, E.Ph. 954; χ. ἀργυρίῳ make use of money, Pl.R. 333b;

    ἀργύρῳ Ar.Ec. 822

    ; χ. ἵπποις manage them, X.Smp.2.10; χ. ἰχθύσι use for food, Plu.2.668f; οἴνῳ χ. ἐπὶ πλέον ib.715d; χ. ναυτιλίῃσι, θαλάσσῃ, Hdt.2.43, Th.1.3;

    ὠνῇ καὶ πρήσι Hdt.1.153

    ;

    δρασμῷ Aeschin.3.21

    ;

    τέχναις X.Mem.3.10.1

    , Oec.4.4;

    τῇ τέχνῃ POxy.1029.25

    (ii A. D.); χρώμενοι τῇ πόλει taking a part in politics, E. Ion 602;

    ἐκκλησίαισιν ἦν ὅτ' οὐκ ἐχρώμεθα Ar.Ec. 183

    ; ἄλλον τρόπον τῇ πολιτείᾳ κέχρημαι, = πεπολίτευμαι, Hyp.Eux.28;

    φωνὴν δυναμένην ὄχλῳ χρῆσθαι Isoc.5.81

    ; τῇ τραπέζῃ τῇ τοῦ πατρὸς ἐχρῆτο he had dealings with my father's bank, D.52.3; χ. τοῖς πράγμασι καὶ τοῖς καιροῖς administer them, Isoc.6.50.
    III experience, suffer, be subject to, esp. external events or conditions,

    δάμαρτος 'Ιππολύτας Ἀκάστου δολίαις τέχναισι χρησάμενος

    having experienced,

    Pi.N.4.58

    ;

    κείμεθ' ἀγηράντῳ χρώμενοι εὐλογίῃ Simon.100.4

    ;

    νιφετῷ Hdt.4.50

    ;

    στίβῃ καὶ νιφετῷ Call.Epigr.33.3

    ;

    χειμῶνι Antipho 5.21

    , D.18.194;

    λαίλαπι AP7.503

    (Leon.); στυγεροῖς πνεύμασι Epigr. ap. D.S.13.41 (iv B. C.);

    ἀνάγκῃ Antipho 5.22

    ;

    οἰκεῖα πράγματ' εἰσάγων, οἷς χρώμεθ', οἷς σύνεσμεν Ar.Ra. 959

    ;

    γυναικῶν τῶν τοῖς τόκοις χρωμένων πλείοσιν Arist.HA 582a24

    ;

    ἀπεψίαις χ. IG42(1).126.4

    (Epid., ii A. D.);

    ἑκὼν.. οὐδεὶς δουλίῳ χρῆται ζυγῷ A.Ag. 953

    ; νόμοισι χ. live under laws, Hdt. 1.173, 216, cf. IG9(1).334.19 ([dialect] Locr., v B. C.);

    νόμοις τοῖς ἰδίοις Riv.Fil.58.472

    (Gortyn, iii B. C.);

    ἀνομίᾳ X.Mem.1.2.24

    ;

    γαλανείᾳ χρησάμενοι μανιάδων οἴστρων E.IA 546

    (lyr.); χ. εὐμαρείᾳ to be at ease, S.Tr. 193 (but, ease oneself, Hdt.2.35);

    συντυχίῃ χ. Id.5.41

    ;

    τύχῃ E.Heracl. 714

    , And.1.67, 120;

    πολλῇ εὐτυχίᾳ Pl.Men. 72a

    ; πολλῇ τῇ νίκῃ χρῆται, = παρὰ πολὺ νικᾷ, And.4.31;

    συμφορῇ κεχρημένος Hdt.1.42

    , cf. E.Med. 347;

    τοιούτῳ μόρῳ ἐχρήσατο ὁ παῖς Hdt. 1.117

    ; θείῃ πομπῇ χρεώμενος divinely sent, ib.62; of mental conditions present in the subject, τῷ χόλῳ χρέομαι I feel anger, Sophr. 126;

    λογισάμενος ἢν εὑρίσκῃ πλέω τε καὶ μέζω τὰ ἀδικήματα ἐόντα τῶν ὑποργημάτων, οὕτω τῷ θυμῷ χρᾶται Hdt.1.137

    ; μὴ πάντα θυμῷ χρέο ib. 155;

    ὀργῇ χρωμένη S.OT 1241

    ;

    ὀργῇ μεγάλῃ μοι ἐχρήσω LXX Jb.10.17

    , cf. 19.11, al.; ἀγνωμοσύνῃ χρησάμενοι ἀπέστησαν they stiffened their necks and.. Hdt.5.83; οἴησις γάρ, καὶ μάλιστα ἐν ἰητρικῇ, αἰτίην μὲντοῖσι κεχρημένοισιν, ὄλεθρον δὲ τοῖσι χρεωμένοισι ἐπιφέρει vanity brings blame on its possessor (or victim) and ruin on those who consult him, Hp Decent.4;

    πολλῇ ἀνοίᾳ χρώμενος Antipho 3.3.2

    ;

    ἀμαθίᾳ πλέονι.. χρῆσθε Th.1.68

    ;

    ταῖς ἐπιθυμίαις μείζοσιν ἢ κατὰ τὴν ὑπάρχουσαν οὐσίαν ἐχρῆτο Id.6.15

    ;

    φθόνῳ καὶ διαβολῇ χ. Pl.Ap. 18d

    ;

    οὺ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ ἁμαρτίᾳ ἀλλὰ τῇ τοῦ πατάξαντος χρησάμενος ἀπέθανεν Antipho 4.3.4

    ;

    τοῖς ἁμαρτήμασι παραπλησίοις ἐχρήσαντο Isoc.8.104

    ;

    μή τι ἄρα τῇ ἐλαφρίᾳ ἐχρησάμην; 2 Ep.Cor.1.17

    .
    2 with verbal nouns. periphr. for the verb derived from the noun, ἀληθέϊ λόγῳ χ. use true speech, i.e. speak the truth, Hdt.1.14; ἀληθείῃ χ. ib. 116, 7.101; βοῇ χ. set up a cry, Id.4.134; τοιούτῳ πράγματι οὐ κέχρησαι, = οὐδὲν τοιοῦτο ἔπραξας, Hyp.Eux.11; δαψιλέϊ τῷ ποτῷ (fort. πότῳ)

    χρησαμένους Hdt.2.121

    .δ'; ἐσόδῳ χρέο πυκνῶς visit often, Hp.Decent.13;

    ἡ σελήνη.. διὰ παντὸς τῇ ἴσῃ παραυξήσει καὶ μειώσει χρῆται Gem.18.16

    .
    3 c. dupl. dat., use as so and so,

    τοῖς ἀγαθοῖσιν.. χ. πρὸς τὰ κακὰ ἀλκῇ Democr.173

    ;

    μιᾷ πόλει ταύτῃ χ. Th.2.15

    ;

    χ. τῷ σίτῳ ὄψῳ ἢ τῷ ὄψῳ σίτῳ X.Mem.3.14.4

    .
    4 χ. τισιν ἔς τι use for an end or purpose, Hdt.1.34;

    πρός τι X.Oec.11.13

    ;

    ἐπί τι Id.Mem.1.2.9

    ; ἀμφί or περί τι, Id.Oec.9.6, An.3.5.10; with neut. Adj. or Pron. as Adv., τάδε [τῷ ἀμφιβλήστρῳ] χ. makes the following use of the net, Hdt.2.95;

    χρέωνται οὐδὲν ἐλαίῳ Id.1.193

    ; χρυσῷ καὶ χαλκῷ τὰ πάντα χρέωνται ib. 215; λογισμῷ ἐλάχιστα χ., πλεῖστα ἀρετῇ χ., Th.2.11, 5.105; τί χρήσεταί ποτ' αὐτῷ; what use will he make of him? Ar.Ach. 935, cf. X.An.1.3.18;

    χ. τἀνδρὶ τοῖς τ' ἐμοῖς λόγοις S.Tr.60

    ;

    ἠπορούμην ὅ τι χρησαίμην τῇ τούτου παρανομίᾳ Lys.3.10

    .
    b treat, deal with,

    παραδίδωμι χρᾶσθαι αὐτῷ τοῦτο ὅ τι σὺ βούλεαι Hdt.1.210

    , cf. Ar.Nu. 439 (anap.; fort. delendum χρήσθων), Isoc.12.107; εἰ τύχοι (sc. γυνὴ)

    μὴ ἐπιτηδεία γενομένη, τί χρὴ τῇ συμφορᾷ χρῆσθαι; Antipho Soph.49

    ; ἀπορέων ὅ τι χρήσηται τῷ παρεόντι πρήγματι not knowing what to make of it, Hdt.7.213;

    ἠπόρει ὅτι χρήσαιτο Pl.Prt. 321c

    ;

    οὐκ ἂν ἔχοις ὅτι χρῷο σαυτῷ Id.Cri. 45b

    ; in elliptical phrases,

    τί οὖν χρησώμεθα; Id.Ly. 213c

    ;

    Θηβαίους ἔχοντες.. τί χρήσεσθε; D.8.74

    : c. dat. et acc. cogn.,

    χρωμένους τῷ κτείναντι χρείαν ἣν ἂν ἐθέλωσι Pl.Lg. 868b

    , cf. 785b, Clit. 407e.
    IV of persons, χρῆσθαί τινι ὡς .. treat him as..,

    χ. τινὶ ὡς ἀνδρὶ ψεύστῃ Hdt.7.209

    ; χ. [τισὶν] ὡς πολεμίοις, ὡς φίλοις καὶ πιστοῖς, treat as friends or enemies, regard them as such, Th.1.53, X.Cyr.4.2.8; so

    φιλικώτερον χρῆσθαί τισι Id.Mem.4.3.12

    ;

    ὑβριστικῶς χ. τισί D.56.12

    ; also without

    ὡς, ἔμοιγε χρώμενος διδασκάλῳ A.Pr. 324

    , cf. Heraclit.104;

    ὥς γ' ἐμοὶ χρῆσθαι κριτῇ E.Alc. 801

    ;

    οὐ σφόδρα ἐχρώμην Αυκίνῳ φίλῳ Antipho 5.63

    ;

    πλείστοις καὶ δεινοτάτοις ἐχροῖς χ. And.4.2

    ;

    ἀσθενέσι χ. πολεμίοις X.Cyr.3.2.4

    .
    b χρῆσθαί τινι (without φίλῳ) to be intimate with a man, X.Hier.5.2, Mem.4.8.11;

    χρῆσθαι καὶ συνεῖναί τισι And.1.49

    ; ἀνάγκη, ὃς ἂν γένηται (sc. παῖς, son), τούτῳ χρῆσθαι one must put up with the son that is born, Democr.277: ἰητρῷ μὴ χρωμένους not consulting a doctor, Hp. de Arte5 (so c. dat. et acc., ἐσιέναι παρὰ βασιλέα μηδένα, δι' ἀγγέλων δὲ πάντα χρᾶσθαι (sc. αὐτῷ) deal with him in everything by messengers, Hdt.1.99); so Πλάτωνι, Ξενοφῶντι, χ. use, study their writings, Plu.2.79d: abs.,

    οἱ χρώμενοι

    friends,

    X.Ages.11.13

    , Mem.2.6.5, Isoc.6.44.
    2 esp. of sexual intercourse,

    γυναιξὶ ἐχρᾶτο Hdt.2.181

    , cf. X.Mem.1.2.29, 2.1.30, Is.3.10, D.59.67.
    3 χρῆσθαι ἑαυτῷ make use ofoneself or one's powers, with a part.,

    οὐδ' ὑγιαίνοντι χρώμενος ἑαυτῷ Plu.Nic.17

    ;

    αὑτῷ νήφοντι χ. Id.Eum.16

    : so with an Adv.,

    χ. ἑαντῷ πρὸς τοὺς κινδύνους ἀφειδῶς Id.Alex.45

    ; παρέχειν ἑαυτὸν ταῖς ἀρχαῖς χρῆσθαι place oneself at the disposal of another, X.Cyr.1.2.13, cf. 8.1.5.
    V abs., or with Adv., χρῶνται Πέρσαι οὕτω so the Persians are wont to do, such is their custom. ib.4.3.23.
    VI in later Gk. ( τῷ μεγαλόφρονι shd. be read for τὸ μεγαλόφρον in X.Ages.11.11) c. acc. rei,

    χ. τὰ ἀπὸ λιμένων.. εἰς διοίκησιν τῆς πόλεως Arist.Oec. 1350a7

    ; [θησαυρὸν] χρησάμενοι (v.l. κτησάμενοι) LXXWi.7.14;

    οἱ χρώμενοι τὸν κόσμον ὡς μὴ καταχρώμενοι 1 Ep.Cor.7.31

    ;

    ἄνηθον μετ' ἐλαίου χρήσασθαι IG42(1).126.27

    (Epid., ii A. D.);

    ὕδωρ χρῶ PTeb.273.28

    (ii/iii A. D.):— for Hdt.1.99, v. supr. IV. 1b.
    VII [voice] Pass., to be used, esp. in [tense] aor., αἱ δὲ (sc. αἱ νέες)

    οὐκ ἐχρήσθησαν Hdt.7.144

    ; τέως ἂν χρησθῇ so long as it be in use, D.21.16; [

    σιδήρου τοῦ] χρησθέντος εἰς τύλους Supp.Epigr.4.447.48

    (Didyma, ii B. C.); Hsch. also has χρησθήσεται· χρησιμεύσει:—v. supr. A.11.
    D for χρή, v. sub voc. (Origin and historical order of the forms and senses not clear: χρή and χρῄζω are cogn.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > χράω

  • 16 ab

    ăb, ā, abs, prep. with abl. This IndoEuropean particle (Sanscr. apa or ava, Etr. av, Gr. upo, Goth. af, Old Germ. aba, New Germ. ab, Engl. of, off) has in Latin the following forms: ap, af, ab (av), au-, a, a; aps, abs, as-. The existence of the oldest form, ap, is proved by the oldest and best MSS. analogous to the prep. apud, the Sanscr. api, and Gr. epi, and by the weakened form af, which, by the rule of historical grammar and the nature of the Latin letter f, can be derived only from ap, not from ab. The form af, weakened from ap, also very soon became obsolete. There are but five examples of it in inscriptions, at the end of the sixth and in the course of the seventh century B. C., viz.:

    AF VOBEIS,

    Inscr. Orell. 3114;

    AF MVRO,

    ib. 6601;

    AF CAPVA,

    ib. 3308;

    AF SOLO,

    ib. 589;

    AF LYCO,

    ib. 3036 ( afuolunt =avolant, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull., is only a conjecture). In the time of Cicero this form was regarded as archaic, and only here and there used in account-books; v. Cic. Or. 47, 158 (where the correct reading is af, not abs or ab), and cf. Ritschl, Monum. Epigr. p. 7 sq.—The second form of this preposition, changed from ap, was ab, which has become the principal form and the one most generally used through all periods—and indeed the only oue used before all vowels and h; here and there also before some consonants, particularly l, n, r, and s; rarely before c, j, d, t; and almost never before the labials p, b, f, v, or before m, such examples as ab Massiliensibus, Caes. B. C. 1, 35, being of the most rare occurrence.—By changing the b of ab through v into u, the form au originated, which was in use only in the two compounds aufero and aufugio for abfero, ab-fugio; aufuisse for afuisse, in Cod. Medic. of Tac. A. 12, 17, is altogether unusual. Finally, by dropping the b of ab, and lengthening the a, ab was changed into a, which form, together with ab, predominated through all periods of the Latin language, and took its place before all consonants in the later years of Cicero, and after him almoet exclusively.—By dropping the b without lengthening the a, ab occurs in the form a- in the two compounds a-bio and a-perio, q. v.—On the other hand, instead of reducing ap to a and a, a strengthened collateral form, aps, was made by adding to ap the letter s (also used in particles, as in ex, mox, vix). From the first, aps was used only before the letters c, q, t, and was very soon changed into abs (as ap into ab):

    abs chorago,

    Plaut. Pers. 1, 3, 79 (159 Ritschl):

    abs quivis,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 3, 1:

    abs terra,

    Cato, R. R. 51;

    and in compounds: aps-cessero,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 1, 24 (625 R.); id. ib. 3, 2, 84 (710 R): abs-condo, abs-que, abs-tineo, etc. The use of abs was confined almost exclusively to the combination abs te during the whole ante-classic period, and with Cicero till about the year 700 A. U. C. (=B. C. 54). After that time Cicero evidently hesitates between abs te and a te, but during the last five or six years of his life a te became predominant in all his writings, even in his letters; consequently abs te appears but rarely in later authors, as in Liv. 10, 19, 8; 26, 15, 12;

    and who, perhaps, also used abs conscendentibus,

    id. 28, 37, 2; v. Drakenb. ad. h. l. (Weissenb. ab).—Finally abs, in consequence of the following p, lost its b, and became ds- in the three compounds aspello, as-porto, and as-pernor (for asspernor); v. these words.—The late Lat. verb abbrevio may stand for adbrevio, the d of ad being assimilated to the following b.The fundamental signification of ab is departure from some fixed point (opp. to ad. which denotes motion to a point).
    I.
    In space, and,
    II.
    Fig., in time and other relations, in which the idea of departure from some point, as from source and origin, is included; Engl. from, away from, out of; down from; since, after; by, at, in, on, etc.
    I.
    Lit., in space: ab classe ad urbem tendunt, Att. ap. Non. 495, 22 (Trag. Rel. p. 177 Rib.):

    Caesar maturat ab urbe proficisci,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 7:

    fuga ab urbe turpissima,

    Cic. Att. 7, 21:

    ducite ab urbe domum, ducite Daphnim,

    Verg. E. 8, 68. Cicero himself gives the difference between ab and ex thus: si qui mihi praesto fuerit cum armatis hominibus extra meum fundum et me introire prohibuerit, non ex eo, sed ab ( from, away from) eo loco me dejecerit....Unde dejecti Galli? A Capitolio. Unde, qui cum Graccho fucrunt? Ex Capitolio, etc., Cic. Caecin. 30, 87; cf. Diom. p. 408 P., and a similar distinction between ad and in under ad.—Ellipt.: Diogenes Alexandro roganti, ut diceret, si quid opus esset: Nunc quidem paululum, inquit, a sole, a little out of the sun, Cic. Tusc. 5, 32, 92. —Often joined with usque:

    illam (mulierem) usque a mari supero Romam proficisci,

    all the way from, Cic. Clu. 68, 192; v. usque, I.—And with ad, to denote the space passed over: siderum genus ab ortu ad occasum commeant, from... to, Cic. N. D. 2, 19 init.; cf. ab... in:

    venti a laevo latere in dextrum, ut sol, ambiunt,

    Plin. 2, 47, 48, § 128.
    b.
    Sometimes with names of cities and small islands, or with domus (instead of the usual abl.), partie., in militnry and nautieal language, to denote the marching of soldiers, the setting out of a flcet, or the departure of the inhabitants from some place:

    oppidum ab Aenea fugiente a Troja conditum,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 33:

    quemadmodum (Caesar) a Gergovia discederet,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 43 fin.; so id. ib. 7, 80 fin.; Sall. J. 61; 82; 91; Liv. 2, 33, 6 al.; cf.:

    ab Arimino M. Antonium cum cohortibus quinque Arretium mittit,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 11 fin.; and:

    protinus a Corfinio in Siciliam miserat,

    id. ib. 1, 25, 2:

    profecti a domo,

    Liv. 40, 33, 2;

    of setting sail: cum exercitus vestri numquam a Brundisio nisi hieme summa transmiserint,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 12, 32; so id. Fam. 15, 3, 2; Caes. B. C. 3, 23; 3, 24 fin.:

    classe qua advecti ab domo fuerant,

    Liv. 8, 22, 6;

    of citizens: interim ab Roma legatos venisse nuntiatum est,

    Liv. 21, 9, 3; cf.:

    legati ab Orico ad M. Valerium praetorem venerunt,

    id. 24, 40, 2.
    c.
    Sometimes with names of persons or with pronouns: pestem abige a me, Enn. ap. Cic. Ac. 2, 28, 89 (Trag. v. 50 Vahl.):

    Quasi ad adulescentem a patre ex Seleucia veniat,

    Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 41; cf.:

    libertus a Fuflis cum litteris ad Hermippum venit,

    Cic. Fl. 20, 47:

    Nigidium a Domitio Capuam venisse,

    id. Att. 7, 24:

    cum a vobis discessero,

    id. Sen. 22:

    multa merces tibi defluat ab Jove Neptunoque,

    Hor. C. 1, 28, 29 al. So often of a person instead of his house, lodging, etc.: videat forte hic te a patre aliquis exiens, from the father, i. e. from his house, Ter. Heaut. 2, 2, 6:

    so a fratre,

    id. Phorm. 5, 1, 5:

    a Pontio,

    Cic. Att. 5, 3 fin.:

    ab ea,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 21; and so often: a me, a nobis, a se, etc., from my, our, his house, etc., Plaut. Stich. 5, 1, 7; Ter. Heaut. 3, 2, 50; Cic. Att. 4, 9, 1 al.
    B.
    Transf., without the idea of motion. To designate separation or distance, with the verbs abesse, distare, etc., and with the particles longe, procul, prope, etc.
    1.
    Of separation:

    ego te afuisse tam diu a nobis dolui,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 1, 2:

    abesse a domo paulisper maluit,

    id. Verr. 2, 4, 18, § 39:

    tum Brutus ab Roma aberat,

    Sall. C. 40, 5:

    absint lacerti ab stabulis,

    Verg. G. 4, 14.—
    2.
    Of distance:

    quot milia fundus suus abesset ab urbe,

    Cic. Caecin. 10, 28; cf.:

    nos in castra properabamus, quae aberant bidui,

    id. Att. 5, 16 fin.; and:

    hic locus aequo fere spatio ab castris Ariovisti et Caesaris aberat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 43, 1:

    terrae ab hujusce terrae, quam nos incolimus, continuatione distantes,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 66, 164:

    non amplius pedum milibus duobus ab castris castra distabant,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 82, 3; cf. id. lb. 1, 3, 103.—With adverbs: annos multos longinque ab domo bellum gerentes, Enn. ap. Non. 402, 3 (Trag. v. 103 Vahl.):

    cum domus patris a foro longe abesset,

    Cic. Cael. 7, 18 fin.; cf.:

    qui fontes a quibusdam praesidiis aberant longius,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 49, 5:

    quae procul erant a conspectu imperii,

    Cic. Agr. 2, 32, 87; cf.:

    procul a castris hostes in collibus constiterunt,

    Caes. B. G. 5, 17, 1; and:

    tu procul a patria Alpinas nives vides,

    Verg. E. 10, 46 (procul often also with simple abl.;

    v. procul): cum esset in Italia bellum tam prope a Sicilia, tamen in Sicilia non fuit,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 2, § 6; cf.:

    tu apud socrum tuam prope a meis aedibus sedebas,

    id. Pis. 11, 26; and:

    tam prope ab domo detineri,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 3, § 6.—So in Caesar and Livy, with numerals to designate the measure of the distance:

    onerariae naves, quae ex eo loco ab milibus passuum octo vento tenebatur,

    eight miles distant, Caes. B. G. 4, 22, 4; and without mentioning the terminus a quo: ad castra contenderunt, et ab milibus passunm minus duobus castra posuerunt, less than two miles off or distant, id. ib. 2, 7, 3; so id. ib. 2, 5, 32; 6, 7, 3; id. B. C. 1, 65; Liv. 38, 20, 2 (for which:

    duo milia fere et quingentos passus ab hoste posuerunt castra,

    id. 37, 38, 5). —
    3.
    To denote the side or direction from which an object is viewed in its local relations,=a parte, at, on, in: utrum hacin feriam an ab laeva latus? Enn. ap. Plaut. Cist. 3, 10 (Trag. v. 38 Vahl.); cf.:

    picus et cornix ab laeva, corvos, parra ab dextera consuadent,

    Plaut. As. 2, 1, 12: clamore ab ea parte audito. on this side, Caes. B. G. 3, 26, 4: Gallia Celtica attingit ab Sequanis et Helvetiis flumen Rhenum, on the side of the Sequani, i. e. their country, id. ib. 1, 1, 5:

    pleraque Alpium ab Italia sicut breviora ita arrectiora sunt,

    on the Italian side, Liv. 21, 35, 11:

    non eadem diligentia ab decumuna porta castra munita,

    at the main entrance, Caes. B. G. 3, 25 fin.:

    erat a septentrionibus collis,

    on the north, id. ib. 7, 83, 2; so, ab oriente, a meridie, ab occasu; a fronte, a latere, a tergo, etc. (v. these words).
    II.
    Fig.
    A.
    In time.
    1.
    From a [p. 3] point of time, without reference to the period subsequently elapsed. After:

    Exul ab octava Marius bibit,

    Juv. 1,40:

    mulieres jam ab re divin[adot ] adparebunt domi,

    immediately after the sucrifice, Plaut. Poen. 3, 3, 4:

    Caesar ab decimae legionis cohortatione ad dextrum cornu profectus,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    ab hac contione legati missi sunt,

    immediately after, Liv. 24, 22, 6; cf. id. 28, 33, 1; 40, 47, 8; 40, 49, 1 al.:

    ab eo magistratu,

    after this office, Sall. J. 63, 5:

    a summa spe novissima exspectabat,

    after the greatest hope, Tac. A. 6, 50 fin. —Strengthened by the adverbs primum, confestim, statim, protinus, or the adj. recens, immediately after, soon after:

    ut primum a tuo digressu Romam veni,

    Cic. Att. 1, 5, 4; so Suet. Tib. 68:

    confestim a proelio expugnatis hostium castris,

    Liv. 30, 36, 1:

    statim a funere,

    Suet. Caes. 85;

    and followed by statim: ab itinere statim,

    id. ib. 60:

    protinus ab adoptione,

    Vell. 2, 104, 3:

    Homerus qui recens ab illorum actate fuit,

    soon after their time, Cic. N. D. 3, 5; so Varr. R. R. 2, 8, 2; Verg. A. 6, 450 al. (v. also primum, confestim, etc.).—

    Sometimes with the name of a person or place, instead of an action: ibi mihi tuae litterae binae redditae sunt tertio abs te die,

    i. e. after their departure from you, Cic. Att. 5, 3, 1: in Italiam perventum est quinto mense a Carthagine Nov[adot ], i. e. after leaving (=postquam a Carthagine profecti sunt), Liv. 21, 38, 1:

    secundo Punico (bello) Scipionis classis XL. die a securi navigavit,

    i. e. after its having been built, Plin. 16, 39, 74, § 192. —Hence the poct. expression: ab his, after this (cf. ek toutôn), i. e. after these words, hereupon, Ov. M. 3, 273; 4, 329; 8, 612; 9, 764.
    2.
    With reference to a subsequent period. From, since, after:

    ab hora tertia bibebatur,

    from the third hour, Cic. Phil. 2, 41:

    infinito ex tempore, non ut antea, ab Sulla et Pompeio consulibus,

    since the consulship of, id. Agr. 2, 21, 56:

    vixit ab omni aeternitate,

    from all eternity, id. Div. 1, 51, 115:

    cum quo a condiscipulatu vivebat conjunctissime,

    Nep. Att. 5, 3:

    in Lycia semper a terrae motu XL. dies serenos esse,

    after an earthquake, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211 al.:

    centesima lux est haec ab interitu P. Clodii,

    since the death of, Cic. Mil. 35, 98; cf.:

    cujus a morte quintus hic et tricesimus annus est,

    id. Sen. 6, 19; and:

    ab incenso Capitolio illum esse vigesumiun annum,

    since, Sall. C. 47, 2:

    diebus triginta, a qua die materia caesa est,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 36.—Sometimes joined with usque and inde:

    quod augures omnes usque ab Romulo decreverunt,

    since the time of, Cic. Vat. 8, 20:

    jam inde ab infelici pugna ceciderant animi,

    from the very beginning of, Liv. 2, 65 fin. —Hence the adverbial expressions ab initio, a principio, a primo, at, in, or from the beginning, at first; v. initium, principium, primus. Likewise ab integro, anew, afresh; v. integer.—Ab... ad, from (a time)... to:

    ab hora octava ad vesperum secreto collocuti sumus,

    Cic. Att. 7, 8, 4; cf.:

    cum ab hora septima ad vesperum pugnatum sit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 26, 2; and:

    a quo tempore ad vos consules anni sunt septingenti octoginta unus,

    Vell. 1, 8, 4; and so in Plautus strengthened by usque:

    pugnata pugnast usque a mane ad vesperum,

    from morning to evening, Plaut. Am. 1, 1, 97; id. Most. 3, 1, 3; 3, 2, 80.—Rarely ab... in: Romani ab sole orto in multum diei stetere in acie, from... till late in the day, Liv. 27, 2, 9; so Col. 2, 10, 17; Plin. 2, 31, 31, § 99; 2, 103, 106, § 229; 4, 12, 26, § 89.
    b.
    Particularly with nouns denoting a time of life:

    qui homo cum animo inde ab ineunte aetate depugnat suo,

    from an early age, from early youth, Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 24; so Cic. Off. 2, 13, 44 al.:

    mihi magna cum co jam inde a pueritia fuit semper famillaritas,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 2, 9; so,

    a pueritia,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 11, 27 fin.; id. Fam. 5, 8, 4:

    jam inde ab adulescentia,

    Ter. Ad. 1, 1, 16:

    ab adulescentia,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 1:

    jam a prima adulescentia,

    id. Fam. 1, 9, 23:

    ab ineunte adulescentia,

    id. ib. 13, 21, 1; cf.

    followed by ad: usque ad hanc aetatem ab incunte adulescentia,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 20:

    a primis temporibus aetatis,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 3, 3:

    a teneris unguiculis,

    from childhood, id. ib. 1, 6, 2:

    usque a toga pura,

    id. Att. 7, 8, 5:

    jam inde ab incunabulis,

    Liv. 4, 36, 5:

    a prima lanugine,

    Suet. Oth. 12:

    viridi ab aevo,

    Ov. Tr. 4, 10, 17 al.;

    rarely of animals: ab infantia,

    Plin. 10, 63, 83, § 182.—Instead of the nom. abstr. very often (like the Greek ek paioôn, etc.) with concrete substantives: a pucro, ab adulescente, a parvis, etc., from childhood, etc.:

    qui olim a puero parvulo mihi paedagogus fuerat,

    Plaut. Merc. 1, 1, 90; so,

    a pausillo puero,

    id. Stich. 1, 3, 21:

    a puero,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 36, 115; id. Fam. 13, 16, 4 (twice) al.:

    a pueris,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 24, 57; id. de Or. 1, 1, 2 al.:

    ab adulescente,

    id. Quint. 3, 12:

    ab infante,

    Col. 1, 8, 2:

    a parva virgine,

    Cat. 66, 26 al. —Likewise and in the same sense with adject.: a parvo, from a little child, or childhood, Liv. 1, 39, 6 fin.; cf.:

    a parvis,

    Ter. And. 3, 3, 7; Cic. Leg. 2, 4, 9:

    a parvulo,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 8; id. Ad. 1, 1, 23; cf.:

    ab parvulis,

    Caes. B. G. 6, 21, 3:

    ab tenero,

    Col. 5, 6, 20;

    and rarely of animals: (vacca) a bima aut trima fructum ferre incipit,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 1, 13.
    B.
    In other relations in which the idea of going forth, proceeding, from something is included.
    1.
    In gen. to denote departure, separation, deterring, avoiding, intermitting, etc., or distance, difference, etc., of inanimate or abstract things. From: jus atque aecum se a malis spernit procul, Enn. ap. Non. 399, 10 (Trag. v. 224 Vahl.):

    suspitionem et culpam ut ab se segregent,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 42:

    qui discessum animi a corpore putent esse mortem,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 9, 18:

    hic ab artificio suo non recessit,

    id. ib. 1, 10, 20 al.:

    quod si exquiratur usque ab stirpe auctoritas,

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 180:

    condicionem quam ab te peto,

    id. ib. 2, 4, 87; cf.:

    mercedem gloriae flagitas ab iis, quorum, etc.,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 15, 34:

    si quid ab illo acceperis,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 2, 90:

    quae (i. e. antiquitas) quo propius aberat ab ortu et divina progenie,

    Cic. Tusc. 1, 12, 26:

    ab defensione desistere,

    Caes. B. C. 2, 12, 4:

    ne quod tempus ab opere intermitteretur,

    id. B. G. 7, 24, 2:

    ut homines adulescentis a dicendi studio deterream,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 117, etc.—Of distance (in order, rank, mind, or feeling):

    qui quartus ab Arcesila fuit,

    the fourth in succession from, Cic. Ac. 1, 12, 46:

    tu nunc eris alter ab illo,

    next after him, Verg. E. 5, 49; cf.:

    Aiax, heros ab Achille secundus,

    next in rank to, Hor. S. 2, 3, 193:

    quid hoc ab illo differt,

    from, Cic. Caecin. 14, 39; cf.:

    hominum vita tantum distat a victu et cultu bestiarum,

    id. Off. 2, 4, 15; and:

    discrepare ab aequitate sapientiam,

    id. Rep. 3, 9 fin. (v. the verbs differo, disto, discrepo, dissideo, dissentio, etc.):

    quae non aliena esse ducerem a dignitate,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 7:

    alieno a te animo fuit,

    id. Deiot. 9, 24 (v. alienus). —So the expression ab re (qs. aside from the matter, profit; cf. the opposite, in rem), contrary to one's profit, to a loss, disadvantageous (so in the affirmative very rare and only ante-class.):

    subdole ab re consulit,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 1, 12; cf. id. Capt. 2, 2, 88; more frequently and class. (but not with Cicero) in the negative, non, haud, ab re, not without advantage or profit, not useless or unprofitable, adcantageous:

    haut est ab re aucupis,

    Plaut. As. 1, 3, 71:

    non ab re esse Quinctii visum est,

    Liv. 35, 32, 6; so Plin. 27, 8, 35; 31, 3, 26; Suet. Aug. 94; id. Dom. 11; Gell. 18, 14 fin.; App. Dogm. Plat. 3, p. 31, 22 al. (but in Ter. Ad. 5, 3, 44, ab re means with respect to the money matter).
    2.
    In partic.
    a.
    To denote an agent from whom an action proceeds, or by whom a thing is done or takes place. By, and in archaic and solemn style, of. So most frequently with pass. or intrans. verbs with pass. signif., when the active object is or is considered as a living being: Laudari me abs te, a laudato viro, Naev. ap. Cic. Tusc. 4, 31, 67: injuria abs te afficior, Enn. ap. Auct. Her. 2, 24, 38:

    a patre deductus ad Scaevolam,

    Cic. Lael. 1, 1:

    ut tamquam a praesentibus coram haberi sermo videretur,

    id. ib. 1, 3:

    disputata ab eo,

    id. ib. 1, 4 al.:

    illa (i. e. numerorum ac vocum vis) maxime a Graecia vetere celebrata,

    id. de Or. 3, 51, 197:

    ita generati a natura sumus,

    id. Off. 1, 29, 103; cf.:

    pars mundi damnata a rerum natura,

    Plin. 4, 12, 26, § 88:

    niagna adhibita cura est a providentia deorum,

    Cic. N. D. 2, 51 al. —With intrans. verbs:

    quae (i. e. anima) calescit ab eo spiritu,

    is warmed by this breath, Cic. N. D. 2, 55, 138; cf. Ov. M. 1, 417: (mare) qua a sole collucet, Cic. Ac. 2, 105:

    salvebis a meo Cicerone,

    i. e. young Cicero sends his compliments to you, id. Att. 6, 2 fin.:

    a quibus (Atheniensibus) erat profectus,

    i. e. by whose command, Nep. Milt. 2, 3:

    ne vir ab hoste cadat,

    Ov. H. 9, 36 al. —A substantive or adjective often takes the place of the verb (so with de, q. v.):

    levior est plaga ab amico quam a debitore,

    Cic. Fam. 9, 16, 7; cf.:

    a bestiis ictus, morsus, impetus,

    id. Off. 2, 6, 19:

    si calor est a sole,

    id. N. D. 2, 52:

    ex iis a te verbis (for a te scriptis),

    id. Att. 16, 7, 5:

    metu poenae a Romanis,

    Liv. 32, 23, 9:

    bellum ingens a Volscis et Aequis,

    id. 3, 22, 2:

    ad exsolvendam fldem a consule,

    id. 27, 5, 6.—With an adj.:

    lassus ab equo indomito,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 10:

    Murus ab ingenic notior ille tuo,

    Prop. 5, 1, 126:

    tempus a nostris triste malis,

    time made sad by our misfortunes, Ov. Tr. 4, 3, 36.—Different from per:

    vulgo occidebantur: per quos et a quibus?

    by whom and upon whose orders? Cic. Rosc. Am. 29, 80 (cf. id. ib. 34, 97: cujus consilio occisus sit, invenio; cujus manu sit percussus, non laboro); so,

    ab hoc destitutus per Thrasybulum (i. e. Thrasybulo auctore),

    Nep. Alc. 5, 4.—Ambiguity sometimes arises from the fact that the verb in the pass. would require ab if used in the active:

    si postulatur a populo,

    if the people demand it, Cic. Off. 2, 17, 58, might also mean, if it is required of the people; on the contrary: quod ab eo (Lucullo) laus imperatoria non admodum exspectabatur, not since he did not expect military renown, but since they did not expect military renown from him, Cic. Ac. 2, 1, 2, and so often; cf. Rudd. II. p. 213. (The use of the active dative, or dative of the agent, instead of ab with the pass., is well known, Zumpt, § 419. It is very seldom found in prose writers of the golden age of Roman liter.; with Cic. sometimes joined with the participles auditus, cognitus, constitutus, perspectus, provisus, susceptus; cf. Halm ad Cic. Imp. Pomp. 24, 71, and ad ejusdem, Cat. 1, 7 fin.; but freq. at a later period; e. g. in Pliny, in Books 2-4 of H. N., more than twenty times; and likewise in Tacitus seventeen times. Vid. the passages in Nipperd. ad Tac. A. 2, 49.) Far more unusual is the simple abl. in the designation of persons:

    deseror conjuge,

    Ov. H. 12, 161; so id. ib. 5, 75; id. M. 1, 747; Verg. A. 1, 274; Hor. C. 2, 4, 9; 1, 6, 2;

    and in prose,

    Quint. 3, 4, 2; Sen. Contr. 2, 1; Curt. 6, 7, 8; cf. Rudd. II. p. 212; Zumpt ad Quint. V. p. 122 Spalding.—Hence the adverbial phrase a se=uph heautou, sua sponte, of one's own uccord, spontaneously:

    ipsum a se oritur et sua sponte nascitur,

    Cic. Fin. 2, 24, 78:

    (urna) ab se cantat quoja sit,

    Plaut. Rud. 2, 5, 21 (al. eapse; cf. id. Men. 1, 2, 66); so Col. 11, 1, 5; Liv. 44, 33, 6.
    b.
    With names of towns to denote origin, extraction, instead of gentile adjectives. From, of:

    pastores a Pergamide,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 1:

    Turnus ab Aricia,

    Liv. 1, 50, 3 (for which Aricinus, id. 1, 51, 1):

    obsides dant trecentos principum a Cora atque Pometia liberos,

    Liv. 2, 22, 2; and poet.: O longa mundi servator ab Alba, Auguste, thou who art descended from the old Alban race of kings (=oriundus, or ortus regibus Albanis), Prop. 5, 6, 37.
    c.
    In giving the etymology of a name: eam rem (sc. legem, Gr. nomon) illi Graeco putant nomine a suum cuique tribuendo appellatam, ego nostro a legendo, Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 19: annum intervallum regni fuit: id ab re... interregnum appellatum, Liv. 1, 17, 6:

    (sinus maris) ab nomine propinquae urbis Ambracius appellatus,

    id. 38, 4, 3; and so Varro in his Ling. Lat., and Pliny, in Books 1-5 of H. N., on almost every page. (Cf. also the arts. ex and de.)
    d.
    With verbs of beginning and repeating: a summo bibere, in Plaut. to drink in succession from the one at the head of the table:

    da, puere, ab summo,

    Plaut. As. 5, 2, 41; so,

    da ab Delphio cantharum circum, id Most. 1, 4, 33: ab eo nobis causa ordienda est potissimum,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 7, 21:

    coepere a fame mala,

    Liv. 4, 12, 7:

    cornicem a cauda de ovo exire,

    tail-foremost, Plin. 10, 16, 18:

    a capite repetis, quod quaerimus,

    Cic. Leg. 1, 6, 18 al.
    e.
    With verbs of freeing from, defending, or protecting against any thing:

    a foliis et stercore purgato,

    Cato, R. R. 65 (66), 1:

    tantumne ab re tuast oti tibi?

    Ter. Heaut. 1, [p. 4] 1, 23; cf.:

    Saguntini ut a proeliis quietem habuerant,

    Liv. 21, 11, 5:

    expiandum forum ab illis nefarii sceleris vestigiis,

    Cic. Rab. Perd. 4, 11:

    haec provincia non modo a calamitate, sed etiam a metu calamitatis est defendenda,

    id. Imp. Pomp. 6, 14 (v. defendo):

    ab incendio urbem vigiliis munitam intellegebat,

    Sall. C. 32:

    ut neque sustinere se a lapsu possent,

    Liv. 21, 35, 12:

    ut meam domum metueret atque a me ipso caveret,

    Cic. Sest. 64, 133.
    f.
    With verbs of expecting, fearing, hoping, and the like, ab =a parte, as, Cic. Att. 9, 7, 4: cum eadem metuam ab hac parte, since I fear the same from this side; hence, timere, metuere ab aliquo, not, to be afraid of any one, but, to fear something (proceeding from) from him:

    el metul a Chryside,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 79; cf.:

    ab Hannibale metuens,

    Liv. 23, 36; and:

    metus a praetore,

    id. 23, 15, 7;

    v. Weissenb. ad h. l.: a quo quidem genere, judices, ego numquam timui,

    Cic. Sull. 20, 59:

    postquam nec ab Romanis robis ulla est spes,

    you can expect nothing from the Romans, Liv. 21, 13, 4.
    g.
    With verbs of fastening and holding:

    funiculus a puppi religatus,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 51, 154:

    cum sinistra capillum ejus a vertice teneret,

    Q. Cic. Pet. Cons. 3.
    h.
    Ulcisci se ab aliquo, to take vengeance on one:

    a ferro sanguis humanus se ulciscitur,

    Plin. 34, 14, 41 fin.
    i.
    Cognoscere ab aliqua re to knoio or learn by means of something (different from ab aliquo, to learn from some one):

    id se a Gallicis armis atque insignibus cognovisse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 22.
    j.
    Dolere, laborare, valere ab, instead of the simple abl.:

    doleo ab animo, doleo ab oculis, doleo ab aegritudine,

    Plaut. Cist. 1, 1, 62:

    a morbo valui, ab animo aeger fui,

    id. Ep. 1, 2, 26; cf. id. Aul. 2, 2, 9:

    a frigore et aestu ne quid laborent,

    Varr. R. R. 2, 2, 17; so,

    a frigore laborantibus,

    Plin. 32, 10, 46, § 133; cf.:

    laborare ab re frumentaria,

    Caes. B. G. 7, 10, 1; id. B. C. 3, 9; v. laboro.
    k.
    Where verbs and adjectives are joined with ab, instead of the simple abl., ab defines more exactly the respect in which that which is expressed by the verb or adj. is to be understood, in relation to, with regard to, in respect to, on the part of:

    ab ingenio improbus,

    Plaut. Truc. 4, 3, 59:

    a me pudica'st,

    id. Curc. 1, 1, 51:

    orba ab optimatibus contio,

    Cic. Fl. 23, 54; ro Ov. H. 6,156: securos vos ab hac parte reddemus, Planc. ap. Cic. Fam. 10, 24 fin. (v. securus):

    locus copiosus a frumento,

    Cic. Att. 5, 18, 2; cf.:

    sumus imparati cum a militibas tum a pecunia,

    id. ib. 7, 15 fin.:

    ille Graecus ab omni laude felicior,

    id. Brut. 16, 63:

    ab una parte haud satis prosperuin,

    Liv. 1, 32, 2 al.;

    so often in poets ab arte=arte,

    artfully, Tib. 1, 5, 4; 1, 9, 66; Ov. Am. 2, 4, 30.
    l.
    In the statement of the motive instead of ex, propter, or the simple abl. causae, from, out of, on account of, in consequence of: ab singulari amore scribo, Balb. ap. Cic. Att. 9, 7, B fin.:

    linguam ab irrisu exserentem,

    thrusting out the tongue in derision, Liv. 7, 10, 5:

    ab honore,

    id. 1, 8; so, ab ira, a spe, ab odio, v. Drak. ad Liv. 24, 30, 1: 26, 1, 3; cf. also Kritz and Fabri ad Sall. J. 31, 3, and Fabri ad Liv. 21, 36, 7.
    m.
    Especially in the poets instead of the gen.:

    ab illo injuria,

    Ter. And. 1, 1, 129:

    fulgor ab auro,

    Lucr. 2, 5:

    dulces a fontibus undae,

    Verg. G. 2, 243.
    n.
    In indicating a part of the whole, for the more usual ex, of, out of:

    scuto ab novissimis uni militi detracto,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 25, 1:

    nonnuill ab novissimis,

    id. ib.; Cic. Sest. 65, 137; cf. id. ib. 59 fin.: a quibus (captivis) ad Senatum missus (Regulus).
    o.
    In marking that from which any thing proceeds, and to which it belongs:

    qui sunt ab ea disciplina,

    Cic. Tusc. 2, 3, 7:

    ab eo qui sunt,

    id. Fin. 4, 3, 7:

    nostri illi a Platone et Aristotele aiunt,

    id. Mur. 30, 63 (in imitation of oi upo tinos).
    p.
    To designate an office or dignity (with or without servus; so not freq. till after the Aug. period;

    in Cic. only once): Pollex, servus a pedibus meus,

    one of my couriers, Cic. Att. 8, 5, 1; so,

    a manu servus,

    a secretary, Suet. Caes. 74: Narcissum ab eplstulis ( secretary) et Pallantem a rationibus ( accountant), id. Claud. 28; and so, ab actis, ab admissione, ab aegris, ab apotheca, ab argento, a balneis, a bibliotheca, a codicillis, a jumentis, a potione, etc. (v. these words and Inscr. Orell. vol. 3, Ind. xi. p. 181 sq.).
    q.
    The use of ab before adverbs is for the most part peculiar to later Latinity:

    a peregre,

    Vitr. 5, 7 (6), 8:

    a foris,

    Plin. 17, 24, 37; Vulg. Gen, 7, 16; ib. Matt. 23, 27:

    ab intus,

    ib. ib. 7, 15:

    ab invicem,

    App. Herb. 112; Vulg. Matt. 25, 32; Cypr. Ep. 63, 9: Hier. Ep. 18:

    a longe,

    Hyg. Fab. 257; Vulg. Gen. 22, 4; ib. Matt. 26, 58:

    a modo,

    ib. ib. 23, 39;

    Hier. Vit. Hilar.: a nune,

    Vulg. Luc. 1, 48:

    a sursum,

    ib. Marc. 15, 38.
    a.
    Ab is not repeated like most other prepositions (v. ad, ex, in, etc.) with pron. interrog. or relat. after subst. and pron. demonstr. with ab:

    Arsinoen, Stratum, Naupactum...fateris ab hostibus esse captas. Quibus autem hostibus? Nempe iis, quos, etc.,

    Cic. Pis. 37, 91:

    a rebus gerendis senectus abstrahit. Quibus? An iis, quae in juventute geruntur et viribus?

    id. Sen. 6:

    a Jove incipiendum putat. Quo Jove?

    id. Rep. 1, 36, 56:

    res publica, quascumque vires habebit, ab iis ipsis, quibus tenetur, de te propediem impetrabit,

    id. Fam. 4, 13, 5.—
    b.
    Ab in Plantus is once put after the word which it governs: quo ab, As. 1, 1, 106.—
    c.
    It is in various ways separated from the word which it governs:

    a vitae periculo,

    Cic. Brut. 91, 313:

    a nullius umquam me tempore aut commodo,

    id. Arch. 6, 12:

    a minus bono,

    Sall. C. 2, 6:

    a satis miti principio,

    Liv. 1, 6, 4:

    damnis dives ab ipsa suis,

    Ov. H. 9, 96; so id. ib. 12, 18; 13, 116.—
    d.
    The poets join a and que, making aque; but in good prose que is annexed to the following abl. (a meque, abs teque, etc.):

    aque Chao,

    Verg. G. 4, 347:

    aque mero,

    Ov. M. 3, 631:

    aque viro,

    id. H. 6, 156:

    aque suis,

    id. Tr. 5, 2, 74 al. But:

    a meque,

    Cic. Fam. 2, 16, 1:

    abs teque,

    id. Att. 3, 15, 4:

    a teque,

    id. ib. 8, 11, §

    7: a primaque adulescentia,

    id. Brut. 91, 315 al. —
    e.
    A Greek noun joined with ab stands in the dat.: a parte negotiati, hoc est pragmatikê, removisse, Quint. 3, 7, 1.
    III.
    In composition ab,
    1.
    Retains its original signif.: abducere, to take or carry away from some place: abstrahere, to draw auay; also, downward: abicere, to throw down; and denoting a departure from the idea of the simple word, it has an effect apparently privative: absimilis, departing from the similar, unlike: abnormis, departing from the rule, unusual (different from dissimilis, enormis); and so also in amens=a mente remotus, alienus ( out of one's senses, without self-control, insane): absurdus, missounding, then incongruous, irrational: abutor (in one of its senses), to misuse: aborior, abortus, to miscarry: abludo; for the privative force the Latin regularly employs in-, v. 2. in.—
    2.
    It more rarely designates completeness, as in absorbere, abutor ( to use up). (The designation of the fourth generation in the ascending or descending line by ab belongs here only in appearance; as abavus for quartus pater, great-great-grandfather, although the Greeks introduced upopappos; for the immutability of the syllable ab in abpatrnus and abmatertera, as well as the signif. Of the word abavus, grandfather's grandfather, imitated in abnepos, grandchild's grandchild, seems to point to a derivation from avi avus, as Festus, p. 13 Mull., explains atavus, by atta avi, or, rather, attae avus.)

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > ab

  • 17 DRENGR

    (-s, pl. -ir, gen. -ja), m.
    1) a bold, valiant, chivalrous man; drengr góðr, a goodhearted, nobleminded man (auðigr at fé ok drengr góðr); ekki þykki mér þú sterkr, en drengr ertu g., but thou art a good fellow; drengir, en eigi dáðleysingjar, gallant men, and no fainthearts; at þú mættir drengrinn af verða sem beztr, that you might get the greatest credit from it; hafa dreng í serk, to have a stout heart in one’s breast;
    2) a young unmarried man (drengir heita ungir menn búlausir, meðan þeir afla sér fjár eða orðstírs);
    3) attendant (þeir heita konungs drengir, er höfðingjum þjóna);
    4) fellow (lætr síðan sverðit ríða á hálsinn á þeim leiða dreng);
    5) pole cf. ásdrengr.
    * * *
    m., pl. ir, gen. drengs, pl. drengir, on Runic stones drengjar; this is a most curious word, and exclusively Scandinavian; it occurs in the A. S. poem Byrnoth, but is there undoubtedly borrowed from the Danes, as this poem is not very old.
    1. the earliest form was probably drangr, q. v., a rock or pillar, which sense still remains in Edda (Gl.) and in the compds ás-drengr, stýris-drengr, cp. Ivar Aasen; it also remains in the verb drengja.
    2. it then metaphorically came to denote a young unmarried man, a bachelor, A. S. hagestald, N. H. G. hagestolz; drengir heita ungir menn ok búlausir, Edda 107; ungr d., a youth, 623. 22, Post. 656 C. 32, Edda 35; drengr, a youth, Stj. 409; hverrar ættar ertú d., 465; (hence the mod. Dan. sense of a boy); far-d., a sailor.
    3. hence came the usual sense, a bold, valiant, worthy man, and in this sense it is most freq. in all periods of the language. Drengr is a standing word in the Swed. and Dan. Runic monuments, góðr drengr, drengr harða góðr, denoting a good, brave, gallant man, a bold and gentle heart; lagði þá hverr fram sitt skip sem d. var ok skap hafði til, Fms. vi. 315; drengir heita vaskir menn ok batnandi, Edda 107; hraustr d., a gallant d., Ld. 50; d. fullr, a bluff, out-spoken man, Ísl. ii. 363; göfuligr d., Bær. 12; d. góðr, noble-minded; auðigr at fé ok d. góðr, Fms. vi. 356; hann var enn bezti d. ok hófsmaðr um allt, Ld. loo; drengr góðr ok öriggr í öllu, Nj. 30; ekki þyki mér þú sterkr, en drengr ertú góðr, thou art not strong, but thou art a good fellow, Lv. 109; drengs dáð, a ‘derring do,’ the deed of a drengr, Fbr. 90 (in a verse): also used of a lady, kvennskörungr mikill ok d. góðr ok nokkut skaphörð, Nj. 30 (of Bergthora); allra kvenna grimmust ok skaphörðust ok ( but) d. góðr þar sem vel skyldi vera, 147 (of Hildigunna): the phrases, lítill d., a small dreng, or d. at verri, denoting a disgraced man, Nj. 68; at kalla þik ekki at verra dreng, to call thee a dreng none the less for that, Ld. 42; drengir en eigi dáðleysingjar, ‘drengs’ and no lubbers, Sturl. iii. 135; drengr and níðingr are opposed, N. G. L. ii. 420: at Hallgerðr yrði þeim mestr drengr, greatest helper, prop, Nj. 76; at þú mættir drengrinn af verða sem beztr, that thou couldst get the greatest credit from it, Gísl. 48: the phrase, hafa dreng í serk, to have a man (i. e. a stout, bold heart) in one’s sark, in one’s breast, Fms. ix. 381: in addressing, góðr d., my dear fellow, Eg. 407: cp. ‘et quod ipsi in posterurn vocarentur Drenges,’ Du Cange (in a letter of William the Conqueror).
    COMPDS: drengjamóðir, drengjaval, drengsaðal, drengsbót, drengsbragð.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > DRENGR

  • 18 BRÓÐIR

    (gen., dat., and acc. bróður, pl. brœðr), m.
    2) friar.
    * * *
    gen. dat. acc. bróður; pl. nom. acc. bræðr, gen. bræðra, dat. bræðrum: in mod. common usage irregular forms occur, as gen. sing. bróðurs; nom. sing., and gen. dat. acc. are also sometimes confounded, esp. in keeping the nom. form bróðir through all cases, or even the reverse (but rarely) in taking bróður as a nom.; another irregularity is acc. pl. with the article, bræður-nar instead of bræður-na, which latter form only survives in writing, the former in speaking. There is besides an obsolete poetical monosyllabic form brœðr, in nom. dat. acc. sing. and nom. acc. pl.; gen. sing. bræðrs; cp. such rhymes as brœðr—œðri, in a verse of Einar Skúlason (died about 1170); bræðr (dat.) Sinfjötla, Hkv. 2. 8, as nom. sing., Fagrsk. 54, v. l. (in a verse), etc., cp. Lex. Poët. This form is very rare in prose, vide however Nj., Lat. Vers. Johnsonius, 204, 333, v. 1., and a few times in Stj., e. g. síns bræðr, sinn bræðr, 160; it seems to be a Norse form, but occurs now and then in Icel. poetry even of the 15th century, e. g. bræðr nom. sing. rhymes with ræðr, Skáld H. 3. 11, G. H. M. ii. 482, but is quite strange to the spoken language: [Gr. φράτηρ; Lat. frāter; Goth. brôþar; A. S. brôðar; Engl. brother; Germ. bruder; Swed.-Dan. broder, pl. brödre]:—a brother: proverbs referring to this word—saman er bræðra eign bezt at sjá, Gísl. 17; einginn or annars bróðir í leik; móður-bræðrum verða menn líkastir, Bs. i. 134: a distinction is made between b. samfeðri or sammæðri, a brother having the same father or mother, Grág. i. 170 sqq.: in mod. usage more usual al-bróðir, brother on both sides; hálf-bróðir, a half-brother; b. skilgetinn, frater germanus móður-bróðir, a mother’s brother; föður-bróðir, a father’s brother, uncle; afa-bróðir, a grand-uncle on the father’s side; ömmu bróðir, a grand-uncle on the mother’s side; tengda-bróðir, a brother-in-law: in familiar talk an uncle is called ‘brother,’ and an aunt ‘sister.’ The ties of brotherhood were most sacred with the old Scandinavians; a brotherless man was a sort of orphan, cp. the proverb, berr er hverr á baki nema sér bróður eigi; to revenge a brother’s slaughter was a sacred duty; nú tóku þeir þetta fastmælum, at hvárr þeirra skal hefna annars eðr eptir mæla, svá sem þeir sé sambornir bræðr, Bjarn. 58: the word bróðurbani signifies a deadly foe, with whom there can be no truce, Hm. 88, Sdm. 35, Skm. 16, Hdl. 28; instances from the Sagas, Dropl. S. (in fine), Heiðarv. S. ch. 22 sqq., Grett. S. ch. 50. 92 sqq., E ch. 23, Ld. ch. 53 sqq., etc. The same feeling extended to foster-brotherhood, after the rite of blending blood has been performed; see the graphical descriptions in Fbr. S. (the latter part of the Saga), Gísl. ch. 14 sqq., etc. The universal peace of Fróði in the mythical age is thus described, that ‘no one will draw the sword even if he finds his brother’s slayer bound,’ Gs. verse 6; of the slaughter preceding and foreboding the Ragnarök ( the end of the world) it is said, that brothers will fight and put one another to death, Vsp. 46.
    II. metaph.:
    1. in a heathen sense; fóst-bróðir, foster-brother, q. v.; eið-bróðir, svara-bróðir, ‘oath-brother;’ leik-bróðir, play-brother, play-fellow: concerning foster-brothership, v. esp. Gísl. ii, Fbr., Fas. iii. 375 sqq., Hervar. S., Nj. 39, Ls. 9, the phrase, blanda blóði saman.
    2. in a Christian sense, brother, brethren, N. T., H. E., Bs.
    β. a brother, friar; Svörtu-bræðr, Blackfriars; Berfættu-bræðr, q. v.; Kórs-bræðr, Fratres Canonici, Bs., etc.
    COMPDS:
    I. sing., bróður-arfr, m. a brother’s inheritance, Orkn. 96, Fms. ix. 444. bróður-bani, a, m. a brother’s bane, fratricide, Ld. 236, Fms. iii. 21, vide above. bróðiir-baugr, m. weregild due to the brother, N. G. L. i. 74. bróður-blóð, n. a brother’s blood, Stj. 42. Gen. iv. 10. bróður-bætr, f. pl. weregild for a brother, Lv. 89. bróður-dauði, a, m. a brother’s death, Gísl. 24. bróður-deild, f. = bróðurhluti, Fr. bróður-dóttir, f. a brother’s daughter, niece, Grág. i. 170, Nj. 177; bróðurdóttur son, a brother’s son, N. G. L. i. 76. bróður-dráp, n. the slaying of a brother, Stj. 43, Fms. v. 290. bróður-gildr, adj. equal in right (inheritance) to a brother, Fr. bróður-gjöld, n. pl. = bróður-bætr, Eg. 312. bróður-hefnd, f. revenge for the slaying of a brother, Sturl. ii. 68. bróður-hluti, a, m. the share (as to weregild or inheritance) of a brother, Grág. ii. 175. bróður-kona, u, f. a brother’s wife, K. Á. 142. bróöur-kván, f. id., N. G. L. i. 170. bróður-lóð, n. a brother’s share of inheritance. bróður-son, m. a brother’s son, nephew, Nj. 122, Grág. i. 171, Gþl. 239, 240; bróðursona-baugr, Grág. ii. 179.
    II. pl., bræðra-bani, v. bróðurbani, Fbr. 165. bræðra-búr, n. a friar’s bower in a monastery, Dipl. v. 18. bræðra-börn, n. pl. cousins (agnate), Gþl. 245. bræðra-dætr, f. pl. nieces(of brothers), Gþl. 246. bræðra-eign, f. property of brothers, Gísl. 17. bræðra-garðr, m. a ‘brothers-yard,’ monastery, D. N. bræðra-lag, n. fellowship of brethren, in heathen sense = fóstbræðralag, Hkr. iii. 300; of friars, H. E., D. I.; brotherhood, Pass. 9. 6. bræðra-mark, n. astron., the Gemini, Pr. 477. bræðra-skáli, a, m. an apartment for friars, Vm. 109. bræðra-skipti, n. division of inheritance among brothers, Hkr. iii. 52, Fas. i. 512. bræðra-synir, m. pl. cousins (of brothers), Gþl. 53.

    Íslensk-ensk orðabók > BRÓÐIR

  • 19 accepte

    ac-cĭpĭo, cēpi, ceptum, 3, v. a. ( fut. perf. accepso = accepero, Pac. ap. Non. 74, 31, or Rib. Trag. Rel. 118) [capio], to accept.
    I.
    In gen., to take a person or thing to one's self: leno ad se accipiet hominem et aurum, will take the man and his money to himself (into his house), Plaut. Poen. 1, 1, 51.
    a.
    Of things received by the hand, to take, receive: cette manus vestras measque accipite, Enn. ap. Non. 85, 1 (Trag. v. 320 ed. Vahl.):

    ex tua accepi manu pateram,

    Plaut. Amph. 2, 2, 132; hence, trop. of the word given, the promise, with which a grasping of the hand was usually connected: accipe daque fidem, Enn. ap. Macr. S. 6, 1 (Ann. v. 33 ed. Vahl.; so in the Gr. pista dounai kai labein); cf. Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 87; so Verg. A. 8, 150;

    in Ter. of a person to be protected: hanc (virginem) accepi, acceptam servabo,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 62; cf. Cic. Fam. 7, 5, and Sall. C. 6, 5, —
    b.
    Of things received or taken by different parts of the body: accipite hoc onus in vestros collos, Cato ap. Non. 200, 23:

    gremio,

    Verg. A. 1, 685:

    oculis aut pectore noctem (i. e. somnum),

    id. ib. 4, 531.—
    c.
    In gen., very freq.,
    (α).
    as implying action, to take, to take possession of, to accept (Gr. dechesthai);
    (β).
    of something that falls to one's share, to get, to receive, to be the recipient of (Gr. lambanein).—
    (α).
    To take, accept:

    hanc epistulam accipe a me,

    take this letter from me, Plaut. Ps. 2, 2, 52; 4, 2, 26; cf. id. Ep. 3, 4, 26:

    persuasit aliis, ut pecuniam accipere mallent,

    Cic. Off. 2, 23, 82:

    condicionem pacis,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 15:

    armis obsidibusque acceptis Crassus profectus est,

    after he had taken into his possession the arms and hostages, id. ib. 3, 23:

    divitias,

    Nep. Epam. 4, 3:

    aliquid a patre,

    to inherit, id. Timoth. 1, 1; id. Att. 1:

    accipe et haec, manuum tibi quae monumenta mearum sint,

    Verg. A. 3, 486 al. —Hence to receive or entertain as guest:

    haec (tellus) fessos placidissima portu accipit,

    Verg. A. 3, 78:

    Laurentes nymphae, accipite Aenean,

    id. ib. 8, 71; 155; Ov. M. 8, 655 al.—Of admittance to political privileges:

    Nomentani et Pedani in civitatem accepti,

    Liv. 8, 14; cf. Cic. Off. 1, 11, 35:

    magnifice volo summos viros accipere,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 34:

    in loco festivo sumus festive accepti,

    id. ib. 5, 19; so id. Cist. 1, 1, 12; id. Men. 5, 2, 44; id. Pers. 1, 1, 32, etc.; Ter. Eun. 5, 9, 52; Lucr. 3, 907; Cic. Att. 16, 6; Ov. F. 2, 725 al.—Hence also ironically, to entertain, to treat, deal with:

    ego te miseris jam accipiam modis,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 4, 3:

    hominem accipiam quibus dictis maeret,

    id. Men. 5, 1, 7:

    indignis acceptus modis,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 12. Perh. also Lucil. ap. Non. 521, 1: adeo male me accipiunt decimae, treat or use me ill, deal harshly with me; and ib. 240, 8: sic, inquam, veteratorem illum vetulum lupum Hannibalem acceptum (Non. explains the latter in a very unusual manner, by deceptum).—
    (β).
    To get, to receive, to be the recipient of, Pac. ap. Non. 74, 31; Lucr. 1, 819, 909; 2, 762, 885, 1009:

    ictus,

    id. 4, 1048 (cf. Verg. A. 3, 243: vulnera accipiunt tergo): aridior nubes accipit ignem, takes or catches fire, Lucr. 6, 150; Caes. B. G. 1, 48:

    humanitatem iis tribuere debemus, a quibus accepimus,

    Cic. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 9:

    pecuniam ob rem judicandam,

    id. Verr. 1, 38:

    luna lumen solis accipit,

    id. de Or. 3, 45; cf. Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 17:

    praeclarum accepimus a majoribus morem,

    Cic. Off. 3, 10, 44: praecepta, Caes. B. G. 2, 6: accepi tuas litteras (in another sense than above), I have received your letter, it has reached me (allatae sunt ad me), Cic. Fam. 1, 9, 14; 2, 1, 1; 10, 1 al.:

    acceptā injuriā ignoscere quam persequi malebant,

    Sall. C. 9, 3; Caes. B. G. 2, 33:

    calamitatem,

    ib. 1, 31:

    detrimenta,

    ib. 5, 22; cf. Cic. Mur. 21, 44 al. So often of dignities and offices:

    provinciam,

    id. Fam. 2, 10, 2:

    consulatum,

    Suet. Aug. 10:

    Galliam,

    id. Caes. 22 al.
    II.
    In partic.
    A.
    To take a thing by hearing, i. e.,
    1.
    To hear, to perceive, to observe, to learn (cf. opp. do = I give in words, i. e. I say): hoc simul accipe dictum, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 12, 38 (Ann. v. 204): quod ego inaudivi, accipite, Pac. ap. Non. 126, 22 (Rib. Trag. Rel. p. 81): hoc etiam accipe quod dico, Lucil. ap. Non. 240, 1:

    carmen auribus,

    Lucr. 4, 983 (so id. 6, 164); 1, 270; cf. Verg. A. 2, 65:

    voces,

    Lucr. 4, 613 (so 6, 171):

    si te aequo animo ferre accipiet,

    Ter. And. 2, 3, 23:

    quae gerantur, accipies ex Pollione,

    Cic. Fam. 1, 6; 1, 9, 4; Liv. 1, 7. —Hence very freq. in the histt., to get or receive intelligence of any thing, to learn:

    urbem Romam, sicuti ego accepi, condidere atque habuere initio Trojani,

    as I have learned, Sall. C. 6, 1, and so al.—
    2.
    To comprehend or understand any thing communicated:

    haud satis meo corde accepi querelas tuas,

    Plaut. Cas. 2, 2, 18:

    et si quis est, qui haec putet arte accipi posse,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 114:

    ut non solum celeriter acciperet, quae tradebantur, etc.,

    Nep. Att. 1, 3; so Quint. 1, 3, 3; 2, 9, 3 al.—
    3.
    With the accessory idea of judging, to take a thing thus or thus, to interpret or explain, usually constr. with ad or in c. acc.:

    quibus res sunt minus secundae... ad contumeliam omnia accipiunt magis,

    the more unfortunate one is, the more inclined is he to regard every thing as an insult, Ter. Ad. 4, 3, 15:

    in eam partem accipio,

    id. Eun. 5, 2, 37; cf. Cic. Fam. 10, 6; id. Att. 16, 6; Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 2:

    non recte accipis,

    you put a wrong construction upon this, id. And. 2, 2, 30:

    quae sibi quisque facilia factu putat, aequo animo accipit,

    Sall. C. 3, 2.— Hence: accipere aliquid omen, or in omen, to regard a thing as a ( favorable) omen, to accept the omen (cf. dechesthai ton oiônon), Cic. Div. 1, 46, 103; 2, 40, 83; Liv. 1, 7, 11; 21, 63 fin.; Tac. H. 1, 62; id. A. 1, 28; 2, 13; Flor. 4, 12, 14 al.—Hence poet.:

    accipio agnoscoque deos,

    Verg. A. 12, 260; cf. Ov. M. 7, 620.—
    B.
    To take a thing upon one's self, to undertake (syn. suscipio):

    accipito hanc ad te litem,

    Plaut. Most. 5, 2, 23: meā causā causam accipite, Ter. Hec. alt. prol. 47; cf. Cic. Fam. 7, 24; so id. Verr. 2, 3, 22; Quint. 20 al.—Hence also,
    C.
    To bear, endure, suffer any thing disagreeable or troublesome:

    hanccine ego ut contumeliam tam insignem ad me accipiam!

    Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 1:

    nil satis firmi video, quamobrem accipere hunc me expediat metum,

    id. Heaut. 2, 3, 96; 5, 1, 59; id. Eun. 4, 6, 24; id. Ad. 2, 1, 53; id. Ph. 5, 2, 4; Cic. Tusc. 5, 19, 56:

    calamitatem,

    id. Off. 3, 26:

    injuriam,

    id. ib. 1, 11 al.—
    D.
    To accept a thing, to be satisfied with, to approve: dos, Pamphile, est decem talenta; Pam.:

    Accipio,

    Ter. And. 5, 4, 48:

    accepit condicionem, dein quaestum accipit,

    id. ib. 1, 1, 52:

    visa ista... accipio iisque interdum etiam assentior, nec percipio tamen,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 20, 66:

    preces suas acceptas ab dis immortalibus ominati,

    Liv. 42, 30, 8 Drak. Cf. Herz, Caes. B. G. 5, 1: “equi te esse feri similem, dico.” Ridemus et ipse Messius: “accipio.” I allow it, Exactly so, Hor. S. 1, 5, 58.—
    E.
    In mercant. lang., t. t., to receive or collect a sum:

    pro quo (frumento) cum a Varinio praetore pecuniam accepisset,

    Cic. Fl. 45; hence subst.: acceptum, i, n., the receipt, and in account-books the credit side:

    in acceptum referre alicui,

    to carry over to the credit side, to place to one's credit, Cic. Verr. 1, 36, 57; id. Rosc. Com. 2; id. Phil. 2, 16; id. Caec. 6, 17; Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 234 (opp. datum or expensum).—Hence also trop., to owe or be indebted to one, in a good or a bad sense:

    ut esset nemo qui non mihi vitam suam, liberos, remp. referret acceptam,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 5:

    omnia mala, quae postea vidimus, uni accepta referemus Antonio,

    ascribe, id. ib. 22; Caes. B. G. 8, 58; id. B. C, 3, 57: Acceptum [p. 18] refero versibus, esse nocens, Ov. Trist. 2, 10. —
    F.
    In the gram m., to take a word or phrase thus or thus, to explain a word in any manner:

    adversus interdum promiscue accipitur,

    Charis. p. 207 P. al.—(Syn. nanciscor and adipiscor: he to whom something is given, accipit; he who gets by a fortunate occurrence, nanciscitur; he who obtains it by exertion, adipiscitur. Sumimus ipsi: accipimus ab alio,” Vel. Long. p. 2243 P.—“Inter tenere, sumere et accipere hoc interest, quod tenemus quae sunt in nostra potestate: sumimus posita: accipimus data,” Isid. Diff. 1).—Hence, acceptus, a, um, P. a., welcome, agreeable, acceptable (syn. gratus. Acceptus is related to gratus, as the effect to the cause; he who is gratus, i. e. dear, is on that account acceptus, welcome, acceptable;

    hence the usual position: gratus atque acceptus).—First, of persons: essetne apud te is servus acceptissimus?

    Plaut. Cap. 3, 5, 56:

    plebi acceptus erat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 13;

    acceptus erat in oculis,

    Vulg. 1 Reg. 18, 5.—

    Of things: dis et hominibus est acceptum quod, etc.,

    Varr. R. R. 3, 16, 5:

    quod vero approbaris. id gratum acceptumque habendum,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 15, 45:

    munus eorum gratum acceptumque esse,

    Nep. Hann. 7, 3:

    quorum mihi dona accepta et grata habeo,

    Plaut. Truc. 2, 7, 56:

    rem populo Romano gratam acceptamque,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 50;

    tempore accepto exaudivi,

    Vulg. 2 Cor. 6, 2.— Comp., Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 96; Cic. Rep. 6, 13; Tac. A. 6, 45 al.— Sup., see above.— Adv. accepte does not occur.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > accepte

  • 20 accipio

    ac-cĭpĭo, cēpi, ceptum, 3, v. a. ( fut. perf. accepso = accepero, Pac. ap. Non. 74, 31, or Rib. Trag. Rel. 118) [capio], to accept.
    I.
    In gen., to take a person or thing to one's self: leno ad se accipiet hominem et aurum, will take the man and his money to himself (into his house), Plaut. Poen. 1, 1, 51.
    a.
    Of things received by the hand, to take, receive: cette manus vestras measque accipite, Enn. ap. Non. 85, 1 (Trag. v. 320 ed. Vahl.):

    ex tua accepi manu pateram,

    Plaut. Amph. 2, 2, 132; hence, trop. of the word given, the promise, with which a grasping of the hand was usually connected: accipe daque fidem, Enn. ap. Macr. S. 6, 1 (Ann. v. 33 ed. Vahl.; so in the Gr. pista dounai kai labein); cf. Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 87; so Verg. A. 8, 150;

    in Ter. of a person to be protected: hanc (virginem) accepi, acceptam servabo,

    Ter. And. 1, 5, 62; cf. Cic. Fam. 7, 5, and Sall. C. 6, 5, —
    b.
    Of things received or taken by different parts of the body: accipite hoc onus in vestros collos, Cato ap. Non. 200, 23:

    gremio,

    Verg. A. 1, 685:

    oculis aut pectore noctem (i. e. somnum),

    id. ib. 4, 531.—
    c.
    In gen., very freq.,
    (α).
    as implying action, to take, to take possession of, to accept (Gr. dechesthai);
    (β).
    of something that falls to one's share, to get, to receive, to be the recipient of (Gr. lambanein).—
    (α).
    To take, accept:

    hanc epistulam accipe a me,

    take this letter from me, Plaut. Ps. 2, 2, 52; 4, 2, 26; cf. id. Ep. 3, 4, 26:

    persuasit aliis, ut pecuniam accipere mallent,

    Cic. Off. 2, 23, 82:

    condicionem pacis,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 15:

    armis obsidibusque acceptis Crassus profectus est,

    after he had taken into his possession the arms and hostages, id. ib. 3, 23:

    divitias,

    Nep. Epam. 4, 3:

    aliquid a patre,

    to inherit, id. Timoth. 1, 1; id. Att. 1:

    accipe et haec, manuum tibi quae monumenta mearum sint,

    Verg. A. 3, 486 al. —Hence to receive or entertain as guest:

    haec (tellus) fessos placidissima portu accipit,

    Verg. A. 3, 78:

    Laurentes nymphae, accipite Aenean,

    id. ib. 8, 71; 155; Ov. M. 8, 655 al.—Of admittance to political privileges:

    Nomentani et Pedani in civitatem accepti,

    Liv. 8, 14; cf. Cic. Off. 1, 11, 35:

    magnifice volo summos viros accipere,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 2, 34:

    in loco festivo sumus festive accepti,

    id. ib. 5, 19; so id. Cist. 1, 1, 12; id. Men. 5, 2, 44; id. Pers. 1, 1, 32, etc.; Ter. Eun. 5, 9, 52; Lucr. 3, 907; Cic. Att. 16, 6; Ov. F. 2, 725 al.—Hence also ironically, to entertain, to treat, deal with:

    ego te miseris jam accipiam modis,

    Plaut. Aul. 4, 4, 3:

    hominem accipiam quibus dictis maeret,

    id. Men. 5, 1, 7:

    indignis acceptus modis,

    Ter. Ad. 2, 1, 12. Perh. also Lucil. ap. Non. 521, 1: adeo male me accipiunt decimae, treat or use me ill, deal harshly with me; and ib. 240, 8: sic, inquam, veteratorem illum vetulum lupum Hannibalem acceptum (Non. explains the latter in a very unusual manner, by deceptum).—
    (β).
    To get, to receive, to be the recipient of, Pac. ap. Non. 74, 31; Lucr. 1, 819, 909; 2, 762, 885, 1009:

    ictus,

    id. 4, 1048 (cf. Verg. A. 3, 243: vulnera accipiunt tergo): aridior nubes accipit ignem, takes or catches fire, Lucr. 6, 150; Caes. B. G. 1, 48:

    humanitatem iis tribuere debemus, a quibus accepimus,

    Cic. Q. Fr. 1, 1, 9:

    pecuniam ob rem judicandam,

    id. Verr. 1, 38:

    luna lumen solis accipit,

    id. de Or. 3, 45; cf. Hor. Ep. 1, 10, 17:

    praeclarum accepimus a majoribus morem,

    Cic. Off. 3, 10, 44: praecepta, Caes. B. G. 2, 6: accepi tuas litteras (in another sense than above), I have received your letter, it has reached me (allatae sunt ad me), Cic. Fam. 1, 9, 14; 2, 1, 1; 10, 1 al.:

    acceptā injuriā ignoscere quam persequi malebant,

    Sall. C. 9, 3; Caes. B. G. 2, 33:

    calamitatem,

    ib. 1, 31:

    detrimenta,

    ib. 5, 22; cf. Cic. Mur. 21, 44 al. So often of dignities and offices:

    provinciam,

    id. Fam. 2, 10, 2:

    consulatum,

    Suet. Aug. 10:

    Galliam,

    id. Caes. 22 al.
    II.
    In partic.
    A.
    To take a thing by hearing, i. e.,
    1.
    To hear, to perceive, to observe, to learn (cf. opp. do = I give in words, i. e. I say): hoc simul accipe dictum, Enn. ap. Cic. Off. 1, 12, 38 (Ann. v. 204): quod ego inaudivi, accipite, Pac. ap. Non. 126, 22 (Rib. Trag. Rel. p. 81): hoc etiam accipe quod dico, Lucil. ap. Non. 240, 1:

    carmen auribus,

    Lucr. 4, 983 (so id. 6, 164); 1, 270; cf. Verg. A. 2, 65:

    voces,

    Lucr. 4, 613 (so 6, 171):

    si te aequo animo ferre accipiet,

    Ter. And. 2, 3, 23:

    quae gerantur, accipies ex Pollione,

    Cic. Fam. 1, 6; 1, 9, 4; Liv. 1, 7. —Hence very freq. in the histt., to get or receive intelligence of any thing, to learn:

    urbem Romam, sicuti ego accepi, condidere atque habuere initio Trojani,

    as I have learned, Sall. C. 6, 1, and so al.—
    2.
    To comprehend or understand any thing communicated:

    haud satis meo corde accepi querelas tuas,

    Plaut. Cas. 2, 2, 18:

    et si quis est, qui haec putet arte accipi posse,

    Cic. de Or. 1, 25, 114:

    ut non solum celeriter acciperet, quae tradebantur, etc.,

    Nep. Att. 1, 3; so Quint. 1, 3, 3; 2, 9, 3 al.—
    3.
    With the accessory idea of judging, to take a thing thus or thus, to interpret or explain, usually constr. with ad or in c. acc.:

    quibus res sunt minus secundae... ad contumeliam omnia accipiunt magis,

    the more unfortunate one is, the more inclined is he to regard every thing as an insult, Ter. Ad. 4, 3, 15:

    in eam partem accipio,

    id. Eun. 5, 2, 37; cf. Cic. Fam. 10, 6; id. Att. 16, 6; Ter. Eun. 1, 2, 2:

    non recte accipis,

    you put a wrong construction upon this, id. And. 2, 2, 30:

    quae sibi quisque facilia factu putat, aequo animo accipit,

    Sall. C. 3, 2.— Hence: accipere aliquid omen, or in omen, to regard a thing as a ( favorable) omen, to accept the omen (cf. dechesthai ton oiônon), Cic. Div. 1, 46, 103; 2, 40, 83; Liv. 1, 7, 11; 21, 63 fin.; Tac. H. 1, 62; id. A. 1, 28; 2, 13; Flor. 4, 12, 14 al.—Hence poet.:

    accipio agnoscoque deos,

    Verg. A. 12, 260; cf. Ov. M. 7, 620.—
    B.
    To take a thing upon one's self, to undertake (syn. suscipio):

    accipito hanc ad te litem,

    Plaut. Most. 5, 2, 23: meā causā causam accipite, Ter. Hec. alt. prol. 47; cf. Cic. Fam. 7, 24; so id. Verr. 2, 3, 22; Quint. 20 al.—Hence also,
    C.
    To bear, endure, suffer any thing disagreeable or troublesome:

    hanccine ego ut contumeliam tam insignem ad me accipiam!

    Ter. Eun. 4, 7, 1:

    nil satis firmi video, quamobrem accipere hunc me expediat metum,

    id. Heaut. 2, 3, 96; 5, 1, 59; id. Eun. 4, 6, 24; id. Ad. 2, 1, 53; id. Ph. 5, 2, 4; Cic. Tusc. 5, 19, 56:

    calamitatem,

    id. Off. 3, 26:

    injuriam,

    id. ib. 1, 11 al.—
    D.
    To accept a thing, to be satisfied with, to approve: dos, Pamphile, est decem talenta; Pam.:

    Accipio,

    Ter. And. 5, 4, 48:

    accepit condicionem, dein quaestum accipit,

    id. ib. 1, 1, 52:

    visa ista... accipio iisque interdum etiam assentior, nec percipio tamen,

    Cic. Ac. 2, 20, 66:

    preces suas acceptas ab dis immortalibus ominati,

    Liv. 42, 30, 8 Drak. Cf. Herz, Caes. B. G. 5, 1: “equi te esse feri similem, dico.” Ridemus et ipse Messius: “accipio.” I allow it, Exactly so, Hor. S. 1, 5, 58.—
    E.
    In mercant. lang., t. t., to receive or collect a sum:

    pro quo (frumento) cum a Varinio praetore pecuniam accepisset,

    Cic. Fl. 45; hence subst.: acceptum, i, n., the receipt, and in account-books the credit side:

    in acceptum referre alicui,

    to carry over to the credit side, to place to one's credit, Cic. Verr. 1, 36, 57; id. Rosc. Com. 2; id. Phil. 2, 16; id. Caec. 6, 17; Hor. Ep. 2, 1, 234 (opp. datum or expensum).—Hence also trop., to owe or be indebted to one, in a good or a bad sense:

    ut esset nemo qui non mihi vitam suam, liberos, remp. referret acceptam,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 5:

    omnia mala, quae postea vidimus, uni accepta referemus Antonio,

    ascribe, id. ib. 22; Caes. B. G. 8, 58; id. B. C, 3, 57: Acceptum [p. 18] refero versibus, esse nocens, Ov. Trist. 2, 10. —
    F.
    In the gram m., to take a word or phrase thus or thus, to explain a word in any manner:

    adversus interdum promiscue accipitur,

    Charis. p. 207 P. al.—(Syn. nanciscor and adipiscor: he to whom something is given, accipit; he who gets by a fortunate occurrence, nanciscitur; he who obtains it by exertion, adipiscitur. Sumimus ipsi: accipimus ab alio,” Vel. Long. p. 2243 P.—“Inter tenere, sumere et accipere hoc interest, quod tenemus quae sunt in nostra potestate: sumimus posita: accipimus data,” Isid. Diff. 1).—Hence, acceptus, a, um, P. a., welcome, agreeable, acceptable (syn. gratus. Acceptus is related to gratus, as the effect to the cause; he who is gratus, i. e. dear, is on that account acceptus, welcome, acceptable;

    hence the usual position: gratus atque acceptus).—First, of persons: essetne apud te is servus acceptissimus?

    Plaut. Cap. 3, 5, 56:

    plebi acceptus erat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 13;

    acceptus erat in oculis,

    Vulg. 1 Reg. 18, 5.—

    Of things: dis et hominibus est acceptum quod, etc.,

    Varr. R. R. 3, 16, 5:

    quod vero approbaris. id gratum acceptumque habendum,

    Cic. Tusc. 5, 15, 45:

    munus eorum gratum acceptumque esse,

    Nep. Hann. 7, 3:

    quorum mihi dona accepta et grata habeo,

    Plaut. Truc. 2, 7, 56:

    rem populo Romano gratam acceptamque,

    Cic. Phil. 13, 50;

    tempore accepto exaudivi,

    Vulg. 2 Cor. 6, 2.— Comp., Plaut. Pers. 4, 4, 96; Cic. Rep. 6, 13; Tac. A. 6, 45 al.— Sup., see above.— Adv. accepte does not occur.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > accipio

См. также в других словарях:

  • The Incarnation —     The Incarnation     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Incarnation     I. The Fact of the Incarnation     (1) The Divine Person of Jesus Christ     A. Old Testament Proofs     B. New Testament Proofs     C. Witness of Tradition     (2) The Human… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Syro-Aramaic Reading of the Koran —   …   Wikipedia

  • The Church —     The Church     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Church     The term church (Anglo Saxon, cirice, circe; Modern German, Kirche; Sw., Kyrka) is the name employed in the Teutonic languages to render the Greek ekklesia (ecclesia), the term by which… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Seal of Confession —     The Law of the Seal of Confession     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Law of the Seal of Confession     In the Decretum of the Gratian who compiled the edicts of previous councils and the principles of Church law which he published about 1151,… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Cantos — by Ezra Pound is a long, incomplete poem in 120 sections, each of which is a canto . Most of it was written between 1915 and 1962, although much of the early work was abandoned and the early cantos, as finally published, date from 1922 onwards.… …   Wikipedia

  • The Gallican Rite —     The Gallican Rite     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Gallican Rite     This subject will be treated under the following six heads:     I. History and Origin; II. MSS. and Other Sources; III. The Liturgical Year; IV. The Divine Office; V. The… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Celtic Rite —     The Celtic Rite     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Celtic Rite     This subject will be treated under the following seven heads:     I. History and Origin; II. Manuscript Sources; III. The Divine Office; IV. The Mass; V. the Baptismal Service; …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Rosary —     The Rosary     † Catholic Encyclopedia ► The Rosary     I. IN THE WESTERN CHURCH      The Rosary , says the Roman Breviary, is a certain form of prayer wherein we say fifteen decades or tens of Hail Marys with an Our Father between each ten,… …   Catholic encyclopedia

  • The Magician's Nephew —   …   Wikipedia

  • The Electric Company (1971 TV series) — The Electric Company redirects here. For the 2009 revival, see The Electric Company (2009 TV series). For other uses, see Electric company (disambiguation). The Electric Company 1971–1977 logo of The Electric Company. Format Child …   Wikipedia

  • The Book of Mormon and the King James Bible — The Book of Mormon contains many linguistic similarities to the King James Bible. In some cases, entire passages of scripture are duplicated in the Book of Mormon. Sometimes the source is acknowledged, as in the book of sourcetext|source=Book of… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»